Upload
others
View
4
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
Proposals Due Date: May 22nd
, 2015
RFP Coordinator: Amy James
Director of Business Services
Room # 1123
221 S. Quarterline Road
Muskegon, MI 49442
Telephone: (231) 777-0547
Email: [email protected]
FROM THE TIME THIS RFP IS ISSUED UNTIL AWARD FROM THE TIME THIS RFP IS ISSUED UNTIL AWARD FROM THE TIME THIS RFP IS ISSUED UNTIL AWARD FROM THE TIME THIS RFP IS ISSUED UNTIL AWARD NOTFICATION IS MADE, ALL CONTACT WITH MCC NOTFICATION IS MADE, ALL CONTACT WITH MCC NOTFICATION IS MADE, ALL CONTACT WITH MCC NOTFICATION IS MADE, ALL CONTACT WITH MCC
REGARDING THIS RFP MUST BE MADE THROUGH THE MCC RFP COORDINATOR. NO OTHER PERSON/MCC REGARDING THIS RFP MUST BE MADE THROUGH THE MCC RFP COORDINATOR. NO OTHER PERSON/MCC REGARDING THIS RFP MUST BE MADE THROUGH THE MCC RFP COORDINATOR. NO OTHER PERSON/MCC REGARDING THIS RFP MUST BE MADE THROUGH THE MCC RFP COORDINATOR. NO OTHER PERSON/MCC
EMPLOYEE IS EMPOWERED TO MAKE BINDING STATEMENTS REGARDING THIS RFP. VIOLATION OF THIS EMPLOYEE IS EMPOWERED TO MAKE BINDING STATEMENTS REGARDING THIS RFP. VIOLATION OF THIS EMPLOYEE IS EMPOWERED TO MAKE BINDING STATEMENTS REGARDING THIS RFP. VIOLATION OF THIS EMPLOYEE IS EMPOWERED TO MAKE BINDING STATEMENTS REGARDING THIS RFP. VIOLATION OF THIS
PROVISION MAY LEAD TO DISQUALIFICATION FROPROVISION MAY LEAD TO DISQUALIFICATION FROPROVISION MAY LEAD TO DISQUALIFICATION FROPROVISION MAY LEAD TO DISQUALIFICATION FROM THE BIDDING PROCESS AT MCC’S DISCRETIONM THE BIDDING PROCESS AT MCC’S DISCRETIONM THE BIDDING PROCESS AT MCC’S DISCRETIONM THE BIDDING PROCESS AT MCC’S DISCRETION
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
2
RFP TITLE PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I INTRODUCTION
A. PURPOSE
B. SCOPE OF SERVICES
C. BACKGROUND
D. GENERAL INFORMATION
E. GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
F. PROPOSAL FORMAT
PART II GENERAL INFORMATION
A. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY NOTICE
B. INSURANCE
PART III PROPOSAL FORMS
A. List of References Form
B. Proposer’s Certification Form
Part III (Attached to RFP)
BMA Architects P.C. – Construction Drawings and Specifications
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
3
PART I INTRODUCTION
A. PURPOSE
Muskegon Community College is seeking a General Contractor for Lower Level Food Service
Improevments
B. SCOPE OF SERVICES
Refer to attached Construction Drawing documents and specifications provided by BMA Architects
P.C..
C. BACKGROUND
MCC was founded as Muskegon Junior College in 1926, and has been continually accredited by
the Higher Learning Commission of North Central Association since 1929. MCC moved to its
current campus location, an Alden B. Dow designed facility that opened to the public in 1967.
In 1995, the Stevenson Center for Higher Education opened, comprising a consortium of Ferris
State University, Grand Valley State University, and Western Michigan University, designed to
increase access to educational opportunities for Muskegon residents. In 2010 the Outdoor
Learning Lab, a focal point of green technology and center for MCC’s new Alternative and
Renewable Energy certificate program opened. MCC is currently located on a 111-acre campus in
Muskegon, with extension centers in Fremont, Grand Haven, Newaygo and Whitehall.
In 2013, MCC received approval and funding for a construction and renovation project involving
four major areas that include: Science, Technology, Engineering, and Math (STEM) Center, MCC
Muskegon Downtown Center, Health and Physical Education Center, and a Creative and
Performing Arts Center. According to MCC President, Dr. Dale Nesbary, “Muskegon Community
College needs to compete on a national and global level. In addition to meeting crucial student
needs, this expansion will also benefit employers and the community at large. It will help attract
and retain talented individuals and equip them with the science skills to make them both more
effective employees and informed residents, critical to improving the overall health of our
communities. Moreover, MCC’s growth from approximately 2,000 in the mid-1960s to
approximately 5,000 credit-bearing students has led to the need for additional academic space in
the STEM fields.”
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
4
D. GENERAL INFORMATION
Selection of the Vendor will be at the discretion of Muskegon Community College and the College
reserves the right to reject any or all proposals. All proposers will be notified whether or not they
have been chosen as finalists for an interview and demonstration. After the interview, the
selected firm will be recommended to the Board of Trustees for approval.
1. Modifications: Muskegon Community College reserves the right to request that the proposer
modify the proposal to more fully meet the needs of the college.
2. Request for Additional Information: The proposer shall furnish such additional
information if Muskegon Community College may require.
3. Acceptance/Rejection/Modification to Proposals: Muskegon Community College reserves the
right to negotiate modifications to proposals that it deems acceptable, reject any and all
proposals, and waive minor irregularities in the procedures.
4. Questions: General PFP questions Should be addressed to Amy James at
[email protected]. All technical questions shall be address to Owners Consultant
BMA Architects P.C., David J. Mayville, AIA, email: [email protected].
5. GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
By submitting a response to this RFP, Bidder agrees to the following terms and conditions:
1. Legal Compliance: Work performed and plans produced shall comply with all state, federal and
local laws, including but not limited to those related to building, environmental, statutory, legal
process, OSHA and the Fair Labor Standards Act.
2. Termination: The contract may be terminated by mutual consent of both parties or by
Muskegon Community College at its discretion. This contract, if awarded, may be cancelled in
whole or in part by Muskegon Community College upon giving at least sixty (60) days written
notice prior to cancellation; except that nonperformance on the part of the contractor(s) will be
grounds for termination upon fifteen
(15) day written notice.
3. Manner of Performance: The firm will abide by all State and Federal Regulations on wages and
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
5
hours of any employee. The firm shall be responsible for all of its employees, subcontractors and
their actions during their term of the contract with Muskegon Community College.
E. PROPOSAL FORMAT
1. Bid Form: Refer to attached specifications for Bid Form.
2. References: List at least three (3) client references. (See attachment)
3. Proposer Responsibilities: The vendor is responsible for conducting necessary research,
visiting the site and becoming familiar with conditions under which the work is to be
performed:
a) Proposal Amendments. MCC reserves the right to amend this RFP without altering the
timing requirements indicated. Any changes or addenda to this RFP will be communicated
in writing to all Bidders as quickly as possible.
b) Proposal Rejection. MCC reserves the right to reject any Bidder’s response for any
reason. MCC is under no obligation to award any Bidder the business, and may elect to
reject all responses and pursue actions outside of this RFP process.
c) Bidder Expenses. Bidder is solely responsible for any expenses incurred by it for proposal
preparation and submission. This includes attendance at personal interviews or other
meetings.
d) Instruction and Format Requirements. All proposals should adhere to the instruction
and format requirements outlined in this RFP and in all written supplements and
amendments (such as summary of Questions and Answers), issued by MCC.
e) Criteria for Award Consideration. Bidders shall take careful note that only materials
offered in the proposal, information provided through interviews (if any), and internal
Departmental information of previous contract history will be criteria for award
consideration. The proposal shall be signed by a person authorized to legally bind the
Bidder and shall contain a statement that the proposal and the pricing contained therein
will remain valid for a period of 90 days from the proposal due date.
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
6
f) Final Contract Documents. If MCC awards this project to a Bidder, this RFP and the
selected Bidder’s proposal, including all appendices or attachments, will become part of
the final contract.
g) Freedom of Information Act. The content of all proposals, correspondence, addenda,
memoranda, working papers and other medium which discloses any aspect of the RFP
process shall be considered public information when the award decision is announced. This
includes all proposals received in response to this RFP, both the selected proposal(s) and
the proposal(s) not selected, and the information in those proposals that a Bidder may
consider proprietary in nature. Therefore, MCC makes no representation it can or will
maintain the confidentiality of such information. The act of submitting a proposal to MCC
shall be construed as understanding and acceptance of this public information disclosure
requirement.
PART II GENERAL INFORMATION
A. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY NOTICE
It is the policy of MCC to provide equal opportunities and not discriminate in enrollment,
education, employment, public accommodations, activities or services on the basis of race, color,
religion, sex, national origin, marital status, sexual orientation, political persuasion, disability,
height, weight, age, or other prohibitive matters.
It is the policy of MCC to patronize only those firms and Providers that demonstrate a
commitment to equal opportunity within their own enterprises and who abide by Federal and
State laws.
B. INSURANCE
1. Coverage. The selected Provider shall maintain insurance, having the coverage described
below and approved by MCC, prior to the contract, and shall maintain such insurance until
the contract is terminated according to the prescribed procedures.
2. Evidence of Insurance. Prior to taking occupancy, Vendor shall furnish Muskegon
Community College, with a certificate(s) of insurance, executed by a duly authorized
representative of each insurer, showing compliance with the insurance requirements set
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
7
forth above. Failure to furnish the required certificate or failure to maintain the required
insurance may result in termination of the agreement at Muskegon Community College’s
option. Any waiver of Vendor’s obligation to furnish such certificate or maintain such
insurance must be in writing and signed by an authorized representative of Muskegon
Community College. Failure of Muskegon Community College to demand such certificate
or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of
Muskegon Community College to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall
not be construed as a waiver of Vendor’s obligation to maintain such insurance, or as a
waiver as to the enforcement of any of these provisions at a later date.
3. Certified Copies of Policies. Provider shall provide certified copies of all insurance
policies required above within ten (10) days of MCC’s written request for said copies.
4. Commercial General and Umbrella Liability Insurance. Vendor shall maintain
commercial general liability (CGL) and, if necessary, commercial umbrella insurance with a
limit of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence. If such CGL insurance contains a general
aggregate limit, it shall be for at least twice the each occurrence limit. CGL insurance shall
be written on an occurrence form and shall cover liability arising from premises,
operations, products-completed operations, personal and advertising injury, and liability
assumed under an insured contract, including the tort liability of another assumed in a
business contract. “Muskegon Community College, its elected and appointed officials,
employees, students, agents and volunteers “shall be included as an insured under the
CGL, and under the commercial umbrella, if any. This insurance shall apply as primary
insurance with respect to any other insurance or self-insurance programs afforded to
Muskegon Community College. There shall be no endorsement or modification of the
CGL limiting the scope of coverage for liability assumed under a contract.
5. Automobile and Umbrella Liability Insurance. Vendor shall maintain automobile liability
and, if necessary, commercial umbrella liability insurance with a limit of not less than
$1,000,000 each accident. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto
(including owned, hired, and nonowned autos).
6. Workers Compensation Insurance. Vendor shall maintain workers compensation and
employers liability insurance. The commercial umbrella and/or employers liability limits
shall not be less than the statutory limits required under Michigan law.
7. Commercial Property Insurance. Provider may, at its option, purchase business income,
extra expense or similar coverage, and in no event shall MCC be liable for any business
interruption or other consequential loss sustained by Provider, whether or not it is insured,
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
8
even if such loss is caused by the negligence of MCC, its elected and appointed officials,
employees, students, agents or volunteer. Provider may, at its option, purchase insurance
to cover its personal property. In no event shall MCC be liable for any damage to or loss of
personal property sustained by Provider, whether or not it is insured, even if such loss is
caused by the negligence of MCC, its elected and appointed officials, employees, students,
agents and volunteers.
8. Acceptability of Insurers. All required insurance shall be purchased from insurers
acceptable to MCC. MCC shall have the right to reject insurance from an insurer that it
deems unacceptable due to poor financial condition or because it is not operating legally.
9. No Representation of Coverage Adequacy. By requiring insurance herein, Muskegon
Community College does not represent that coverage and limits will necessarily be
adequate to protect Vendor, and such coverage and limits shall not be deemed as a
limitation on Vendor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Muskegon Community
College in this contract.
10. Indemnification. Neither party is contracting or agreeing to indemnify the other.
Muskegon Community College has no authority to agree to indemnify any other party.
Statutory and common law theories and principles of indemnification, contribution, and
equitable restitution shall govern and apply to claims, actions, causes of action, costs,
expenses and losses (including attorneys' fees) resulting from or caused by the actions or
omissions of the parties or their employees pursuant to this contract.
11. Subcontractor Requirements. Provider agrees to contractually obligate its
subcontractors to indemnify MCC in precise conformance to the terms of Provider’s
obligation to indemnify MCC pursuant to this Agreement. The Provider further agrees to
contractually obligate its subcontractors to provide insurance with the insurance
coverage’s and limits of liability required to be provided by the Provider pursuant to the
terms and conditions of this Agreement.
12. Cancellation or Reduction in Coverage. In the event of a lapse or reduction in the
required coverage’s, the Provider shall cease operations and shall not resume operations
until new insurance is in force.
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
9
PART III PROPOSAL FORMS
LIST OF REFERENCES
IMPORTANT: This form must be returned with the bid proposal form.
1. Name of Company
Address
Contact Person/Title
Telephone Number
2. Name of Company
Address
Contact Person/Title
Telephone Number
3. Name of Company
Address
Contact Person/Title
Telephone Number
Authorized Signature Printed Name and Title
MUSKEGON COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
Lower Level Food Service Improvements
PROPOSER’S CERTIFICATION
I have carefully examined the Request for Proposal, Instructions, Terms and Conditions, Scope of
Services, Bid forms and all other documents accompanying this proposal.
I propose to furnish the services specified in the Request for Proposal at the prices or rates quoted in my
proposal. I agree that my proposal will remain firm for a period of ninety (90) days in order to allow
Muskegon Community College adequate time to evaluate the proposals.
I certify that all information contained in this Request for Proposal is truthful to the best of my knowledge and belief. I further certify I am duly authorized to submit this proposal on behalf of the vendor/contractor and that the vendor/contractor is ready, willing and able to perform if awarded this Bid/Proposal.
I further certify that this bid/proposal is made without prior understanding, agreement, connection,
discussion or collusion with any other person, firm or corporation submitting a bid/proposal for the
same commodity or service; no officer, employee or agent of Muskegon Community College or of
any other bidder/proposer interested in bid/proposal; and the undersigned executed this
bidders/proposers certification with full knowledge and understanding of the matters contained and
was duly authorized to do so.
Name of Business
Signature
Name & Title
Mailing Address
Telephone Number
LOWER LEVEL FOOD SERVICE IMPROVEMENTS Muskegon Community College
Muskegon Michigan
May 2015
DIRECTORY:
Owner: Muskegon Community College
221 S. Quarterline Road
Muskegon MI 49442
Architect:
BMA Architects, P.C.
17216 Van Wagoner
Spring Lake MI 49456
Ph. 1.231.798.2334
Contact: David J. Mayville, AIA
e-mail: [email protected]
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
Page 1 of 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MCC RFP FRONT END
SPECIFICATIONS COVER SHEET
DIRECTORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREVAILING WAGE REPORT
PROJECT SCHEDULE
DIVISION 1&2 – GENERAL
010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
012100 ALLOWANCES
013300 ARCHITECTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017810 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE WORK
NOT USED
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
NOT USED
DIVISION 5 – METALS
NOT USED
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
NOT USED
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083300 ROLLING GRILLES
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
Page 2 of 2
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
NOT USED
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
114000 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – CASEWORK
123200 INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
NOT USED
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
REFER TO DRAWING DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
REFER TO DRAWING DOCMENTS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
REFER TO DRAWING DOCMENTS
DRAWING DOCUMENT
Sheet T1 – 24 x 35
Sheet A1 – 24 x 36
State of Michigan [email protected]
Official Request #: 521 Requestor: Muskegon Community College Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel Project Number:
Muskegon County Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 1 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer MLDC 10/1/2014 $40.25 $53.64 $67.03 H H H X X X X D Y 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday, must be consecutive
Asbestos & Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler Asbestos and Lead Abatement, Hazardous AS207 10/1/2014 $40.25 $53.58 $66.90 H H H X X X X D Y Material Handler 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday, must be consecutive
Boilermaker Boilermaker BO169 2/17/2015 $54.70 $81.08 $107.45 H H H H H H H D Y
Apprentice Rates:
1st 6 months $40.31 $59.49 $78.67
2nd 6 months $41.45 $61.21 $80.95
3rd 6 months $42.57 $62.88 $83.19
4th 6 months $43.69 $64.57 $85.43
5th 6 months $44.81 $66.24 $87.67
6th 6 months $48.63 $72.50 $96.36
7th 6 months $49.32 $73.01 $96.69
8th 6 months $51.58 $76.40 $101.21
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 1 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 2 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Bricklayer Bricklayer, Block Masonry, Stone Mason and BR-9-1-B 3/17/2015 $39.83 $52.71 $65.59 H H H H H H H D Y Artificial Masonry Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-F; Saturday make up day Apprentice Rates:
0-749 hours $29.53 $37.26 $44.99
750 - 1,499 hours $30.81 $39.18 $47.55
1,500 - 2,249 hours $32.10 $41.11 $50.13
2,250 - 2,999 hours $33.39 $43.05 $52.71
3,000 - 3,749 hours $34.68 $44.99 $55.29
3,750 - 4,499 hours $35.97 $46.92 $57.87
4,500 - 5,249 hours $37.25 $48.84 $60.43
5,250 - 6,000 hours $38.54 $50.77 $63.01
Carpenter Carpenter CA-100 6/6/2014 $36.95 $46.78 $56.60 X X H H H H H D N Make up day allowed comment Saturday Apprentice Rates:
1st year $29.09 $34.98 $40.88
2nd year $31.06 $37.94 $44.82
3rd year $33.02 $40.88 $48.74
4th year $34.00 $42.35 $50.70
Floor Layer CA-100FL 6/6/2014 $39.16 $50.08 $61.00 X X H H H H H D N Make up day allowed comment Saturday Apprentice Rates:
1st year $30.42 $36.97 $43.52
2nd year $32.61 $40.26 $47.90
3rd year $34.79 $43.52 $52.26
4th year $35.88 $45.16 $54.44
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 2 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 3 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Cement Finisher Cement Finisher & Plasterer BR-9-1-CF 3/17/2015 $35.28 $46.63 $57.98 X X H X X X H D Y 4 10s allowed M-F; plasterer OT schedule is HHHHHHHDY
Apprentice Rates:
0-749 hours $27.34 $34.72 $42.10
750-1499 hours $28.47 $36.42 $44.36
1500-2249 hours $29.60 $38.11 $46.62
2250-2999 hours $30.74 $39.82 $48.90
3000-3749 hours $31.87 $41.52 $51.16
3750-4499 hours $33.01 $43.22 $53.44
Cement Mason Cement Mason PL16-8 10/23/2012 $33.93 $44.51 $55.08 H H H H H H H D Y
Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday or Saturday inclement weather make up days. Saturday hours for inclement weather make up shall be paid straight rate unless over 40 hours worked. Make up day allowed comment Friday or Saturday for inclement weather Apprentice Rates:
1st year $26.53 $33.40 $40.28
2nd year $28.64 $36.57 $44.50
3rd year $30.76 $39.75 $48.74
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 3 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 4 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Drywall Drywall Taper and Finisher PT-845-DF 7/8/2014 $37.39 $49.64 $61.89 H H H H H H H D N
Apprentice Rates:
0 - 1,000 hours $26.37 $33.11 $39.85
1,001 - 2,000 hours $27.59 $34.94 $42.29
2,001 to 3,000 hours $29.55 $37.88 $46.21
3,001 to 4,000 hours $31.27 $40.46 $49.65
4,001 to 5,000 hours $33.71 $44.12 $54.53
5,001 to 6,000 hours $36.17 $47.81 $59.45
Electrician Sound and Communication Journeyman EC-275 SC 10/1/2014 $34.32 $47.25 $60.18 H H H H H H H D Y Technician Make up day allowed comment Four consecutive 10s allowed M-Th/Friday may be used as a make-up day Apprentice Rates:
1st period $18.88 $26.64 $34.39
2nd period $21.63 $30.68 $39.73
3rd period $24.37 $34.71 $45.05
4th period $27.12 $38.75 $50.39
Inside Wireman EC-275-IW 10/1/2014 $45.14 $64.28 $83.42 H H H H H H H D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 consecutive 10s allowed M-Th Friday may be used as a make-up day
Apprentice Rates:
0-1000 hours $18.14 $24.03 $29.92
1000-2000 hours $19.62 $26.25 $32.88
2000-3500 hours $22.78 $31.12 $39.45
3500-5000 hours $24.29 $33.38 $42.47
5000-6500 hours $27.93 $38.84 $49.75
6500-8000 hours $31.05 $43.52 $55.99
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 4 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 5 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Lineman/Technician outside utility and EC-876 11/18/2009 $47.05 $68.11 $89.17 H H H H H H H D Y commercial power and high voltage pipe type cable work and electrical underground. Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday makeup or Tuesday-Friday with Monday
Apprentice Rates:
1st period $30.20 $42.69 $55.26
2nd period $32.32 $46.02 $59.70
3rd period $34.42 $49.16 $63.90
4th period $36.53 $52.33 $68.12
5th period $38.63 $55.47 $72.32
6th period $40.74 $58.64 $76.54
7th period $42.84 $61.79 $80.74
Elevator Constructor Elevator Constructor Mechanic EL-85 4/8/2013 $70.77 $116.32 D D D D D D D D Y comment 4 tens allowed M-TH Apprentice Rates:
1st year $50.27 $75.32
2nd year $54.83 $84.44
3rd year $57.10 $88.98
4th year $61.66 $98.10
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 5 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 6 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Glazier Glazier GL-826 7/16/2014 $43.53 $58.26 $72.98 H H H H H H H D Y 4 tens allowed on consecutive days
Apprentice Rates:
1st 6 months $31.04 $39.87 $48.71
2nd 6 months $32.60 $42.17 $51.74
3rd 6 months $34.17 $44.48 $54.79
4th 6 months $35.73 $46.78 $57.82
5th 6 months $37.28 $49.06 $60.84
6th 6 months $38.84 $51.35 $63.87
7th 6 months $40.40 $53.65 $66.90
8th 6 months $41.97 $55.96 $69.95
Heat and Frost Insulator Spray Insulation AS25S 3/5/2007 $20.14 $29.14 H H H H H H H H N
Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker AS47 3/11/2013 $44.40 $58.76 $73.12 H H H H H H H D Y 4 ten hour work days shall be either Monday thru Thursday or Tuesday thru Friday Make up day allowed comment Friday for missed time during M-Th 4 ten schedule Apprentice Rates:
1st year $25.78 $32.96 $40.14
2nd year $29.50 $38.11 $46.73
3rd year $33.22 $43.27 $53.32
4th year $36.95 $48.44 $59.93
5th year $40.68 $53.61 $66.53
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 6 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 7 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Ironworker Pre-engineered Metal Work IR-25-PE-Z2 6/3/2014 $43.02 $52.70 $62.37 X X H X X X X D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 tens allowed M-Th with Saturday make up day Apprentice Rates:
1st Year $26.11 $31.58 $37.06
3rd 6 month period $28.23 $34.46 $40.68
4th 6 month period $30.36 $37.35 $44.33
5th 6 month period $32.48 $40.21 $47.95
6th 6 month period $34.61 $43.10 $51.59
Fence, Sound Barrier & Guardrail IR-340-F2 2/24/2015 $30.71 $40.71 $50.71 X X H X X X H D Y erection/installation and Exterior Signage work Four ten hour work days may be worked during Monday-Saturday.
Apprentice Rates:
60% Level $20.35 $26.35 $32.35
65% Level $21.45 $27.95 $34.45
70% Level $22.56 $29.56 $36.56
75% Level $23.65 $31.15 $38.65
80% Level $24.75 $32.75 $40.75
85% Level $25.85 $34.35 $42.85
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 7 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 8 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Reinforcing: any work in connection with field IR-340-Ref 9/17/2014 $45.05 $55.39 $65.73 H H H H H H H D Y fabrication, post tensioning, prestressing of handling by power, rigging, crane signaling, crane assembly and dismantle, racking, sorting, cutting, bending, hoisting, placing, burning, welding, use of tie gun, and tying of all materials used to reinforce concrete construction. Realigning of reinforcing steel, wire mesh and placing of steel dowels, as well as refastening and resetting same while concrete is being poured. The handling and placing of j or jack bar on slip form construction. The placing of all clips, bolts, and steel rods and wire fabricator mesh pertaining to gunite construction. Drilling holes in concrete for dowels used to reinforce a concrete slab, beam or wall and the use of a chemical anchoring system (such as epoxy) to secure dowels. The use of a non-metallic carbon fiber or polymer typically used to reinforce concrete. Some brand names are NEFMAC, Make up day allowed comment for 4 10s, Fridays for 5 8s, Saturday Both apply if employee loses 4 or more straight time hours in any week because the job is down.
Apprentice Rates:
Registered 1st year $27.16 $33.31 $39.46
Registered 2nd year $28.21 $34.88 $41.56
Registered 3rd year $33.80 $42.05 $50.29
Rigging, heavy machinery moving and related IR-340-RIG 4/4/2013 $37.43 $47.43 $57.43 X X X X X X X D Y tasks Make up day allowed comment Saturday Apprentice Rates:
1st year $22.50 $27.31 $32.11
2nd year $25.61 $33.31 $40.11
3rd year $30.59 $40.17 $48.65
4th year $32.67 $43.52 $53.11
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 8 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 9 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Structural and Finish work: all work related to IR-340-STR 9/17/2014 $45.05 $55.39 $65.73 H H H H H H H D Y the fabrication, erection & construction of all iron, steel, precast and reinforced concrete structures; bolting, decking, siding, glazing and curtain wall, misc steel stairways, handrails; rigging, signaling, loading, unloading, sorting and stacking of all material. The framing and erection or dismantling of all cranes, travelers and derricks. Field & job fabrication cutting, bending, drilling, welding & burning with acetylene torch or electric device; operation of man lifts or equipment to perform work; misc and ornamental iron and metal, including lockers, jail doors, bunks, iron doors, guardhouses, grating, racks, platforms and uni-strut supports; aligning or leveling or surveying in connection with steel or machinery erection. All demolition and dismantling or iron, steel, precast & Make up day allowed comment for 4 10s, Fridays for 5 8s, Saturday Both apply if employee loses 4 or more straight time hours in any week because the job is down.
Apprentice Rates:
1st Year Registered $27.16 $33.31 $39.46
2nd Year Registered $28.21 $34.88 $41.56
3rd Year Registered $33.80 $42.05 $50.29
4th Year Registered $35.90 $45.19 $54.49
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 9 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 10 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Laborer Class A Laborer - all construction on buildings, L355-2-A 6/27/2014 $31.25 $40.48 $49.70 X X H H H H H D Y pumps, well wheels, air, electric or gasoline tools, motor driven buggies, fire watch duty, working on swing scaffolds, heavy construction work, carpenter tender, cement finisher tender, heater tender & flagperson. Cleaning and clearing of all debris, including wire brushing of windows, scraping of floors, removal of surplus material from all fixtures within confines of structure and cleaning all debris in building and construction area. The general cleanup, including sweeping, cleaning, washdown and wiping of construction facility, equipment and furnishings and removal and loading or burning of all debris including crates, boxes, packaging waste material. Washing and cleaning of walls, partitions, ceilings, windows, bathrooms, kitchens, laboratory, and all fixtures and facilities therein. Cleanup, mopping, washing, waxing and polishing or dusting of all Make up day allowed comment Monday - Saturday Apprentice Rates:
0 - 1,000 work hours $26.64 $33.56 $40.48
1,001 - 2,000 work hours $27.56 $34.94 $42.32
2,001 - 3,000 work hours $28.48 $36.32 $44.16
3,001 - 4,000 work hours $30.33 $39.10 $47.86
Class B Laborer - jackhammer operators, L355-2-B 6/27/2014 $31.50 $40.85 $50.20 X X H H H H H D Y crocklayers and caisson worker in buildings. Make up day allowed comment Monday - Saturday Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $26.82 $33.83 $40.84
1,001-2,000 work hours $27.76 $35.24 $42.72
2,001-3,000 work hours $28.70 $36.65 $44.60
3,001-4,000 work hours $30.56 $39.44 $48.32
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 10 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 11 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Class C Laborer - top men on chimneys or L355-2-C 6/27/2014 $32.00 $41.60 $51.20 X X H H H H H D Y towers over thirty feet in height, material mixers, portable mixer operator, plasterer tender, mason tender, and demolition burner. Make up day allowed comment Monday - Saturday Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $27.20 $34.40 $41.60
1,001-2,000 work hours $28.16 $35.84 $43.52
2,001-3,000 work hours $29.12 $37.28 $45.44
3,001-4,000 work hours $31.04 $40.16 $49.28
Class D Laborer - concrete specialist when no L355-2-D 6/27/2014 $35.81 $47.27 $58.72 X X H H H H H D Y cement finishers are available; troweling, finishing, screeding, patching, cutting, curing of cast in place or precast concrete by any and all methods. Make up day allowed comment Monday - Saturday Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $30.08 $38.67 $47.26
1,001-2,000 work hours $31.23 $40.40 $49.56
2,001-3,000 work hours $32.37 $42.10 $51.84
3,001-4,000 work hours $34.66 $45.54 $56.42
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 11 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 12 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Laborer - Hazardous Class A Laborer - performing work in conjunction LHAZ-Z9-A 11/7/2014 $31.79 $44.79 $57.78 H H H H H H H D Y with site preparation and other preliminary work prior to actual removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances not requiring use of personal protective equipment required by state or federal regulations; or a laborer performing work in conjunction with the removal , handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when use of personal protective equipment level " D" is required. Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th or T-F; inclement weather makeup day Friday Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $27.04 $37.66 $48.28
1,001-2,000 work hours $27.99 $39.08 $50.18
2,001-3,000 work hours $28.94 $40.51 $52.08
3,001-4,000 work hours $30.84 $43.36 $55.88
Class B Laborer - performing work in conjunction LHAZ-Z9-B 11/7/2014 $32.79 $46.29 $59.78 H H H H H H H D Y with the removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when the use of personal protective equipment levels "A", "B" or "C" is required. Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th or T-F; inclement weather makeup day Friday Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $27.79 $38.78 $49.78
1,001-2,000 work hours $28.79 $40.28 $51.78
2,001-3,000 work hours $29.79 $41.78 $53.78
3,001-4,000 work hours $31.79 $44.78 $57.78
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 12 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 13 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Laborer Underground - Tunnel, Shaft & Caisson Class I - Tunnel, shaft and caisson laborer, LAUCT-Z2-1 10/30/2014 $35.67 $47.07 $58.47 X X X X X X X D Y dump man, shanty man, hog house tender, testing man (on gas), and watchman.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $30.52 $39.35 $48.17
1,001-2,000 work hours $31.55 $40.90 $50.23
2,001-3,000 work hours $32.58 $42.44 $52.29
3,001-4,000 work hours $34.64 $45.53 $56.41
Class II - Manhole, headwall, catch basin LAUCT-Z2-2 10/30/2014 $35.76 $47.21 $58.65 X X X X X X X D Y builder, bricklayer tender, mortar man, material mixer, fence erector, and guard rail builder
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $30.58 $39.44 $48.29
1,001-2,000 work hours $31.62 $41.00 $50.37
2,001-3,000 work hours $32.66 $42.56 $52.45
3,001-4,000 work hours $34.72 $45.65 $56.57
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 13 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 14 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Class III - Air tool operator (jack hammer man, LAUCT-Z2-3 10/30/2014 $35.86 $47.36 $58.85 X X X X X X X D Y bush hammer man and grinding man), first bottom man, second bottom man, cage tender, car pusher, carrier man, concrete man, concrete form man, concrete repair man, cement invert laborer, cement finisher, concrete shoveler, conveyor man, floor man, gasoline and electric tool operator, gunnite man, grout operator, welder, heading dinky man, inside lock tender, pea gravel operator, pump man, outside lock tender, scaffold man, top signal man, switch man, track man, tugger man, utility man, vibrator man, winch operator, pipe jacking man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.).
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $30.66 $39.56 $48.45
1,001-2,000 work hours $31.70 $41.12 $50.53
2,001-3,000 work hours $32.74 $42.68 $52.61
3,001-4,000 work hours $34.82 $45.80 $56.77
Class IV - Tunnel, shaft and caisson mucker, LAUCT-Z2-4 10/30/2014 $36.02 $47.60 $59.17 X X X X X X X D Y bracer man, liner plate man, long haul dinky driver and well point man.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $30.78 $39.74 $48.69
1,001-2,000 work hours $31.83 $41.32 $50.79
2,001-3,000 work hours $32.88 $42.89 $52.89
3,001-4,000 work hours $34.97 $46.02 $57.07
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 14 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 15 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Class V - Tunnel, shaft and caisson miner, drill LAUCT-Z2-5 10/30/2014 $36.28 $47.99 $59.69 X X X X X X X D Y runner, keyboard operator, power knife operator, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars)
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $30.98 $40.04 $49.09
1,001-2,000 work hours $32.04 $41.63 $51.21
2,001-3,000 work hours $33.10 $43.22 $53.33
3,001-4,000 work hours $35.22 $46.40 $57.57
Class VI - Dynamite man and powder man. LAUCT-Z2-6 10/30/2014 $36.59 $48.45 $60.31 X X X X X X X D Y
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $31.21 $40.38 $49.55
1,001-2,000 work hours $32.28 $41.99 $51.69
2,001-3,000 work hours $33.36 $43.61 $53.85
3,001-4,000 work hours $35.51 $46.84 $58.15
Class VII - Restoration laborer, seeding, LAUCT-Z2-7 10/30/2014 $28.86 $36.86 $44.85 X X X X X X X D Y sodding, planting, cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes and flagstones.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $25.41 $31.68 $37.95
1,001-2,000 work hours $26.10 $32.72 $39.33
2,001-3,000 work hours $26.79 $33.76 $40.71
3,001-4,000 work hours $28.17 $35.82 $43.47
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 15 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 16 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Landscape Laborer Landscape Specialist includes air, gas, and diesel LLAN-Z2-A 6/26/2014 $27.85 $38.49 $49.12 X X H X X X H D Y equipment operator, skidsteer (or equivalent), lawn sprinkler installer on landscaping work where seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintenance of landscape projects occurs. Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.
Skilled Landscape Laborer: small power tool LLAN-Z2-B 6/26/2014 $23.65 $31.06 $38.47 X X H X X X H D Y operator, lawn sprinkler installers' tender, material mover, truck driver on when seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintaining of landscape projects occurs Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.
Operating Engineer Class C- Regular equipment operator, crane, stiff EN-324-BH1C 8/5/2014 $50.15 $64.32 $78.49 H H H H H H H D Y leg derrick, scraper dozer, grader, front end loader, hoist, job mechanic, head grease man, concrete pump truck & hydro excavators Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Apprentice Rates:
0 - 999 hours $40.75 $50.67 $60.59
1,000 - 1,999 hours $42.17 $52.80 $63.43
2,000 - 2,999 hours $43.58 $54.91 $66.25
3,000 - 3,999 hours $45.00 $57.05 $69.09
4,000 - 4,999 hours $46.42 $59.17 $71.93
5.000 - 5,999 hours $47.83 $61.29 $74.75
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 16 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 17 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Class D- Air tugger (single drum), material hoist, EN-324-BH1D 8/5/2014 $45.05 $56.67 $68.29 H H H H H H H D Y boiler operator, sweeping machine, winch truck, Bob Cat & similar equipment, elevators (when operated by an operating engineer), and fork truck over 20' lift Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class E- Pump 6" or over, well points, freeze EN-324-BH1E 9/12/2013 $44.45 $55.77 $67.09 H H H H H H H D Y systems, boom truck (non-swinging), end dumps and laser/power screed, concrete wire saw 20 h.p. and over, & brokk concrete breaker Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class F- Air compressor, welder, generators, EN-324-BH1F 8/5/2014 $42.00 $52.10 $62.19 H H H H H H H D Y conveyors, pumps under 6", Grease man, and fork truck 20' or less lift Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class G- Oiler, fireman and heater operator EN-324-BH1G 8/5/2014 $40.35 $49.62 $58.89 H H H H H H H D Y Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 17 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 18 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 220' or EN-OSA 8/5/2014 $50.90 $65.45 $79.99 H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 300' or EN-OSA3 8/5/2014 $52.40 $67.70 $82.99 H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 400' or EN-OSA4 8/5/2014 $53.90 $69.95 $85.99 H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday
Class B- Crane Operator with main boom and EN-OSB 8/5/2014 $50.65 $65.07 $79.49 H H H H H H H D Y jib 140' or longer, tower cranes, gantry crane, whirley derrick Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Operating Engineer - DIVER Diver/Wet Tender/Tender/Rov Pilot/Rov Tender GLF D 4/2/2014 $52.80 $79.20 $105.60 H H H H H H H D N
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Statewide Page 18 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 19 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Operating Engineer - Marine Construction Diver/Wet Tender, Engineer (hydraulic dredge) GLF-1 2/12/2014 $65.00 $84.85 $104.70 X X H H H H H D Y
Make up day allowed
Subdivision of county all Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Crane/Backhoe Operator, 70 ton or over Tug GLF-2 2/12/2014 $63.50 $82.60 $101.70 X X H H H H H D Y Operator, Mechanic/Welder, Assistant Engineer (hydraulic dredge), Leverman (hydraulic dredge), Diver Tender Holiday pay = $120.80 per hour, wages & Make up day allowed
Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Friction, Lattice Boom or Crane License GLF-2B 2/12/2014 $64.50 $84.10 $103.70 X X H H H H H D Y Certification Holiday pay = $123.30 Make up day allowed
Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands, therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman, GLF-3 2/12/2014 $59.30 $76.30 $93.30 X X H H H H H D Y Maintenance of Crane (over 50 ton capacity) or Backhoe (115,000 lbs or more), Tug/Launch Operator, Loader, Dozer on Barge, Deck Machinery Holiday pay = $110.30 per hour, wages & Make up day allowed
Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Deck Equipment Operator, GLF-4 2/12/2014 $53.60 $67.75 $81.90 X X H H H H H D Y (Machineryman/Fireman), (4 equipment units or more), Off Road Trucks, Deck Hand, Tug Engineer, & Crane Maintenance 50 ton capacity and under or Backhoe 115,000 lbs or less, Assistant Tug Operator Holiday pay = $96.05 per hour, wages & fringes Make up day allowed
Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Statewide Page 19 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 20 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Operating Engineer Steel Work Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 220' or EN-324-SWW1220 8/5/2014 $51.25 $65.97$80.69H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 300' or EN-324-SWW1300 8/5/2014 $52.75 $68.22$83.69H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 400' or EN-324-SWW1400 8/5/2014 $54.25 $70.47$86.69H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday
Class B- Crane Operator with main boom and EN-324-SWW1B 8/5/2014 $51.00 $65.60$80.19H H H H H H H D Y jib 140' or longer, tower cranes, gantry crane, whirley derrick Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates
Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 20 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 21 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Class C- Regular equipment operator, crane, EN-324-SWW1C 8/5/2014 $50.50 $64.85$79.19H H H H H H H D Y dozer, grader, loader, hoist, straddle wagon, job mechanic & hydro excavator Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Apprentice Rates:
0 - 999 hours $40.99 $51.03 $61.07
1,000 - 1,999 hours $42.43 $53.19 $63.95
2,000 - 2,999 hours $43.86 $55.33 $66.81
3,000 - 3,999 hours $45.30 $57.49 $69.69
4,000 - 4,999 hours $46.73 $59.64 $72.55
5,000 - 5,999 hours $48.17 $61.80 $75.43
Class D- Air tugger (single drum), material hoist, EN-324-SWW1D 8/5/2014 $45.40 $57.20$68.99H H H H H H H D Y pump 6" or over, elevators (when operated by an operating engineer) and brokk concrete breaker Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday
Class E- Air compressor, welder, generators and EN-324-SWW1E 8/5/2014 $43.75 $54.72$65.69H H H H H H H D Y conveyors.
Class F- Oiler and Fireman EN-324-SWW1F 8/5/2014 $41.15 $50.82$60.49H H H H H H H D Y
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon
Page 21 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 22 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Operating Engineer Underground Class I Equipment - Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, EN-324A2-UC1 10/14/2014 $50.03 $64.42 $78.80 H H H H H H H D Y Batch Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Paver 2 drums or larger, Conveyor Loader Euclid type, Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, endloader, gradall, grader, hydro excavator, power shovel, roller asphalt, scraper self- propelled or tractor drawn, side boom tractor, slip form paver, slope paver, trencher over 8 ft. digging capacity, well drilling rig, concrete pump
Apprentice Rates:
0-999 hours $40.60 $50.67 $60.74
1,000-1,999 hours $42.04 $52.83 $63.62
2,000-2,999 hours $43.48 $54.99 $66.50
3,000-3,999 hours $44.92 $57.15 $69.38
4,000-4,999 hours $46.36 $59.31 $72.26
5,000-5,999 hours $47.80 $61.48 $75.14
Class II Equipment - Boom Truck, Crusher, EN-324A2-UC2 10/14/2014 $45.14 $57.08 $69.02 H H H H H H H D Y Hoist, Pump 6 inch discharge or larger, side boom tractor, Tractor (pneu-tired other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher 8 ft. digging capcity and smaller, Vac Truck
Class III Equipment - Air Compressors 600 cfm EN-324A2-UC3 10/14/2014 $44.64 $56.33 $68.02 H H H H H H H D Y or larger, Air Compressors 2 or more less than 600 dfm, Boom Truck non-swinging non- powered type boom, Concrete Breaker self- propelled or truck mounted, Concrete paver 1 drum 1/2 yd. or larger, Elevator other than passenger, Pump 4 inch to 6 inch discharge, pumpcrete machine, wagon drill, welding machine or generator 2 or more 300 amp or
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 22 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 23 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Class IV Equipment - Boiler, Concrete Saw 40 EN-324A2-UC4 10/14/2014 $44.36 $55.91 $67.46 H H H H H H H D Y hp or over, curing machine self propelled, end dumps, extend a boom forklift, farm tractor with attachment, finishing machine concrete, firemen, hydraulic pipe pushing machine, mulching equipment, oiler, pumps up to 4 inch discharge, roller other than asphalt, stump remover, sweeper wayne type, trencher, vibrating compaction equipment self propelled 6 ft. wide or over, water wagon.
Painter Painter PT-845-BR 7/17/2014 $33.74 $44.69 $55.63 H H H H H H H D Y
A 4-10s workweek allowed Monday-Thursday.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1000 hours $23.89 $29.91 $35.93
1001-2000 hours $24.98 $31.55 $38.11
2001-3000 hours $26.74 $34.19 $41.63
3001-4000 hours $28.27 $36.48 $44.69
4001-5000 hours $30.46 $39.77 $49.07
5001-6000 hours $32.65 $43.05 $53.45
Pipe and Manhole Rehab General Laborer for rehab work or normal TM247 4/17/2015 $28.20 $38.20 H H H H H H H H N cleaning and cctv work-top man, scaffold man, CCTV assistant, jetter-vac assistant
Tap cutter/CCTV Tech/Grout Equipment TM247-2 4/17/2015 $32.70 $44.95 H H H H H H H H N Operator: unit driver and operator of CCTV; grouting equipment and tap cutting equipment
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Statewide Page 23 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 24 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
CCTV Technician/Combo Unit Operator: unit TM247-3 4/17/2015 $31.45 $43.07 H H H H H H H H N driver and operator of cctv unit or combo unit in connection with normal cleaning and televising work
Boiler Operator: unit driver and operator of TM247-4 4/17/2015 $33.20 $45.70 H H H H H H H H N steam/water heater units and all ancillary equipment associated
Combo Unit driver & Jetter-Vac Operator TM247-5 4/17/2015 $33.20 $45.70 H H H H H H H H N
Pipe Bursting & Slip-lining Equipment Operator TM247-6 4/17/2015 $34.20 $47.20 H H H H H H H H N
Plasterer Plasterer PL16-1 10/23/2012 $33.61 $44.20 $54.79 H H H H H H H D N
Apprentice Rates:
1st year $26.20 $33.09 $39.97
2nd year $28.31 $36.25 $44.19
3rd year $30.43 $39.43 $48.43
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 24 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 25 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder, HVAC & Refrigeration Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder, HVAC & PL-174-PP 10/10/2014 $50.63 $71.63 $92.62 H H D H H H D D Y Refrigeration 4 tens may be worked M-Thursday or Tuesday- F @ the straight time rate. 4 tens may also be worked M-F on a holiday
Apprentice Rates:
1st year $23.94 $31.59 $39.24
2nd year $30.78 $41.85 $52.92
3rd year $32.79 $44.87 $56.94
4th year $36.81 $50.89 $64.98
5th year $40.83 $56.93 $73.02
Pointer, Cleaner and Caulker Pointer, Cleaner and Caulker BR-9-1-C 3/17/2015 $36.86 $48.73 $60.59 H H H H H H H D Y Four 10s allowed M-F
Apprentice Rates:
0-749 hours $28.55 $36.26 $43.97
750-1499 hours $29.74 $38.05 $46.35
1500-2249 hours $30.93 $39.83 $48.73
2250-2999 hours $32.11 $41.60 $51.09
3000-3749 hours $33.30 $43.39 $53.47
3750-4499 hours $34.49 $45.17 $55.85
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 25 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 26 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Roofer Commercial Roofer RO-70-Z5 9/17/2014 $30.97 $41.02 $51.07 X X H X X H H D Y Make up day allowed comment Monday - Saturday Apprentice Rates:
1st Class $20.08 $23.93 $28.59
2nd Class $21.09 $26.65 $32.21
3rd Class $22.10 $28.17 $34.23
4th Class $23.13 $29.71 $36.29
5th Class $24.15 $31.24 $38.33
6th Class $25.16 $32.75 $40.35
7th Class $26.17 $34.27 $42.37
8th Class $27.15 $35.74 $44.33
9th Class $29.03 $38.11 $47.19
Sewer Relining Class I-Operator of audio visual CCTV system SR-I 11/3/2014 $42.76 $57.75 $72.74 H H H H H H H D N including remote in-ground cutter and other equipment used in conjunction with CCTV
Class II-Operator of hot water heaters and SR-II 11/3/2014 $41.23 $55.46 $69.68 H H H H H H H D N circulation system; water jetters; and vacuum and mechanical debris removal systems and those assisting.
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Statewide Page 26 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 27 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker SHM-7-2 9/25/2014 $41.42 $55.55 $69.67 H H H H D D D D Y 4 10s allowed as consecutive days, M-Th or T-F
Apprentice Rates:
1st 6 months $19.90 $26.25 $32.61
2nd 6 months $21.31 $28.37 $35.43
3rd 6 months $22.73 $30.50 $38.27
4th 6 months $24.14 $32.61 $41.09
5th 6 months $31.53 $40.71 $49.89
6th 6 months $32.94 $42.83 $52.71
7th 6 months $34.36 $44.95 $55.55
8th 6 months $35.77 $47.07 $58.37
Sprinkler Fitter Sprinkler Fitter SP 669 9/17/2009 $46.51 $61.99 $77.47 H H H H H H H D Y Make up day allowed
Apprentice Rates:
Class 1 & 2 $23.44 $31.31 $39.17
Class 3 $29.35 $37.75 $46.15
Class 4 $30.93 $40.12 $49.31
Class 5 $35.50 $45.47 $55.45
Class 6 $37.07 $47.83 $58.59
Class 7 $38.65 $50.20 $61.75
Class 8 $40.22 $52.55 $64.89
Class 9 $41.79 $54.91 $68.03
Class 10 $43.36 $57.27 $71.17
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 27 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 28 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Tile, Terrazzo and Mosiac Finisher - Four 10s allowed M-F BR9-31-TF 3/24/2015 $32.19 $41.31 $50.43 H H H H H H H D Y
Apprentice Rates:
0-749 hours $25.81 $31.74 $37.67
750-1,499 hours $26.72 $33.11 $39.49
1,500-2,249 hours $27.63 $34.47 $41.31
2,250-2,999 hours $28.54 $35.83 $43.13
3,000-3,749 hours $29.45 $37.20 $44.95
3,750-4,499 hours $30.37 $38.58 $46.79
Setter - Four 10s allowed M-F BR9-31-TS 3/24/2015 $37.56 $48.33 $59.09 H H H H H H H D Y
Apprentice Rates:
0-749 hours $30.02 $37.01 $44.01
750-1499 hours $31.10 $38.63 $46.17
1500-2249 hours $32.18 $40.25 $48.33
2250-2999 hours $33.25 $41.86 $50.47
3000-3749 hours $34.33 $43.48 $52.63
3750-4499 hours $35.41 $45.10 $54.79
Truck Driver of all trucks of 8 cubic yd capacity or over TM-RB2 8/8/2013 $41.92 $37.85 H H H H H H H H Y
of all trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or less TM-RB2A 8/8/2013 $41.82 $37.70 H H H H H H H H Y (except dump trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or over, tandem axle trucks, transit mix and semis, euclid type equipment, double bottoms and low boys)
on euclid type equipment TM-RB2B 8/8/2013 $41.35 $38.08 H H H H H H H H Y
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 28 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 29 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class I Construction Laborer LAUC-Z4-1 10/30/2014 $32.52 $42.35 $52.17 X X X X X X X D Y
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $28.17 $35.83 $43.47
1,001-2,000 work hours $29.04 $37.13 $45.21
2,001-3,000 work hours $29.91 $38.43 $46.95
3,001-4,000 work hours $31.65 $41.05 $50.43
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class II Mortar and material mixer, concrete form man, LAUC-Z4-2 10/30/2014 $32.65 $42.54 $52.43 X X X X X X X D Y signal man, well point man, manhole, headwall and catch basin builder, guard rail builders, headwall, seawall, breakwall, dock builder and fence erector.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $28.27 $35.97 $43.67
1,001-2,000 work hours $29.14 $37.28 $45.41
2,001-3,000 work hours $30.02 $38.60 $47.17
3,001-4,000 work hours $31.77 $41.23 $50.67
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class III Air, gasoline and electric tool operator, vibrator LAUC-Z4-3 10/30/2014 $32.76 $42.71 $52.65 X X X X X X X D Y operator, drillers, pump man, tar kettle operator, bracers, rodder, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars, etc.), cement finisher, welder, pipe jacking and boring man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.), windlass and tugger man, and directional boring man.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $28.35 $36.09 $43.83
1,001-2,000 work hours $29.23 $37.41 $45.59
2,001-3,000 work hours $30.11 $38.73 $47.35
3,001-4,000 work hours $31.88 $41.39 $50.89
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 29 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 30 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class IV Trench or excavating grade man. LAUC-Z4-4 10/30/2014 $32.83 $42.81 $52.79 X X X X X X X D Y
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $28.40 $36.17 $43.93
1,001-2,000 work hours $29.29 $37.51 $45.71
2,001-3,000 work hours $30.17 $38.83 $47.47
3,001-4,000 work hours $31.94 $41.48 $51.01
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class V Pipe Layer LAUC-Z4-5 10/30/2014 $32.95 $42.99 $53.03 X X X X X X X D Y
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $28.49 $36.31 $44.11
1,001-2,000 work hours $29.38 $37.64 $45.89
2,001-3,000 work hours $30.28 $38.99 $47.69
3,001-4,000 work hours $32.06 $41.66 $51.25
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VI Grouting man, top man assistant, audio visual LAUC-Z4-6 10/30/2014 $30.17 $38.82 $47.47 X X X X X X X D Y television operations and all other operations in connection with closed circuit television inspection, pipe cleaning and pipe relining work & the installation and repair of water service pipe and appurtenances.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $26.41 $33.19 $39.95
1,001-2,000 work hours $27.16 $34.31 $41.45
2,001-3,000 work hours $27.91 $35.43 $42.95
3,001-4,000 work hours $29.42 $37.70 $45.97
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 30 of 31
Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/21/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/20/2015 Page 31 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VII Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, LAUC-Z4-7 10/30/2014 $28.51 $36.33 $44.15 X X X X X X X D Y cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes, flagstones etc.
Apprentice Rates:
0-1,000 work hours $25.16 $31.31 $37.45
1,001-2,000 work hours $25.83 $32.31 $38.79
2,001-3,000 work hours $26.50 $33.32 $40.13
3,001-4,000 work hours $27.84 $35.33 $42.81
Official Request #: 521 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Muskegon Community College Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Bistro / Kitchen - Remodel on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Muskegon Page 31 of 31
ID Task Name Duration Start Finish1 MCC Lower Level Food Service Improvement 212.44 days Mon 1/12/15 Fri 12/11/15
2 Construciton Documents 24 days Wed 4/1/15 Thu 5/7/15
3 Plan Review 20 days Fri 5/8/15 Tue 6/9/15
4 Contractor Bidding for Bldg. Improvements 14 days Fri 5/8/15 Fri 5/29/15
5 Food Service Equipment Shop Drawing & Procurement 28 days Tue 5/12/15 Wed 6/24/15
6 Construction 34 days Tue 6/9/15 Fri 7/31/15
7 Open for Use 0 days Fri 8/7/15 Fri 8/7/15
8
9 MCC Academic Calendar 212.44 days Mon 1/12/15 Fri 12/11/15
10
11 2015 Winter Semester Begin 0 days Mon 1/12/15 Mon 1/12/15
12 2015 Winter Semester End 0 days Tue 5/5/15 Tue 5/5/15
13 2015 Summer Session 0 days Mon 5/18/15 Mon 5/18/15
14 2015 Summer Session 0 days Fri 8/7/15 Fri 8/7/15
15
16 2015 Fall Semester Begin 0 days Mon 8/24/15 Mon 8/24/15
17 2015 Fall Semester End 0 days Fri 12/11/15 Fri 12/11/15
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
8/7
0%
1/12
5/5
5/18
8/7
8/24
12/11
Dec '14 Jan '15 Feb '15 Mar '15 Apr '15 May '15 Jun '15 Jul '15 Aug '15 Sep '15 Oct '15 Nov '15 Dec '15 Jan '16
Critical
Critical Split
Critical Progress
Task
Split
Task Progress
Baseline
Baseline Split
Baseline Milestone
Milestone
Summary Progress
Summary
Rolled Up Critical
Rolled Up Critical Split
Rolled Up Critical Progress
Rolled Up Task
Rolled Up Split
Rolled Up Task Progress
Rolled Up Baseline
Rolled Up Baseline Milestone
Rolled Up Milestone
External Tasks
Project Summary
External Milestone
Inactive Task
Inactive Milestone
Inactive Summary
Manual Task
Duration-only
Manual Summary Rollup
Manual Summary
Start-only
Finish-only
Deadline
MCC - Lower Level Food Service Improvements Updated 050515
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 1
SECTION 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Sealed proposals for General Contractor will be received by Muskegon Community College
at their office located at 221 S. Quarterline Rd, 494424 on May 22nd, until 2:00 pm local
time. Bids received after this time shall be returned unopened. The bid opening will directly follow the close of bidding and will be held at Muskegon Commu-nity College, Stevens Center Auditorium. Bids Shall be executed on forms provided. Each proposal must be accompanied by a satisfactory certified check, money order or bid bond payable to Muskegon Community College for not less than five (5%) percent of the amount of the bid amount and delivered in a sealed envelope bear-ing the bidder’s name, address and project identification. The work includes:
Improvements to relocate existing food service to the lower level of the campus. General
Contractor shall work with Owners Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing contractors for
final hook up and applicable improvements required. Refer to drawing documents for con-
tact information.
The bidding and contract documents are on file and may be requested in electronic format via email to the architect’s office at [email protected].
Documents are also available at: Builders Exchange 4461 Cascade Road SE Grand Rapids, Michigan 49456 616 949-8650 Site visit is scheduled for Thursday May 14
th at 2:00 pm.
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Labor and Material Payment Bond in the amount of one hundred (100%) percent of the contract amount prior to execution of the contract. All bids shall be accompanied by a sworn statement disclosing any familial relationship that ex-ists between the Owner(s) and any employee of the bidder and any member of the board. The
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 2
board of directors shall not accept a bid that does not include a sworn and notarized familial rela-tionship disclosure statement. The owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and/or qualifications, to waive any irregularities, informalities or defects in the documentation, to accept any bid in whole or in part, which it shall deem to be in the best interest of the owner, and to negotiate with the successful bidder.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1- SCOPE OF PROPOSALS - Proposals will be received on the following work: PROPOSAL A - General Construction including all trades as shown on plans. 2- ACCESS TO PLANS - Plans and specifications are on file for reference at the Architect's office and at locations as stated in the Notice to Bidders. These files can be obtained via electronic file from the architects, owner, and/ or builders exchange by request.
3- EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - The bidder shall care-fully examine the site of the project and surrounding territory, the means of approach to the site, and the structure of the ground, and make all necessary investigation required to inform himself thoroughly and fully as to facilities for delivering, storing, placing, and handling of materials and equipment and to inform himself fully as to all difficulties that may be en-countered in the complete execution of all work, in accordance with the contract documents. Each bidder shall examine all drawings, specifications and all other data or instructions per-taining to the work. No plea of ignorance of conditions that exist, or of difficulties of condi-tions that may be encountered, or of any relevant matter concerning the work to be per-formed in the execution of the work, will be accepted as an excuse for any failure or omis-sion on the part of the contractor to fulfill every detail of the requirements of the contract documents governing the work. The Bidder, if awarded the contract, will not be allowed any extra compensation by reason of any matter of thing concerning which bidder might ful-ly have informed himself prior to the bidding. 4- EXPLANATIONS AND ADDENDA - If any person contemplating submitting a bid is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the plans, specifications, or other proposed con-tract documents, he shall submit to the Architect a written request for an interpretation thereof. The person submitting the request shall be responsible for its prompt delivery, and such request should be delivered to the Architect at least four days before the opening of bids. Any interpretation of the proposed documents will be made only by an addendum du-ly issued. A copy of each addendum will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of such contract documents and to such other prospective bidders as have requested that they be furnished with a copy of each addendum. The provisions of any addendum issued during the bidding period shall be included in the bid, and in closing a contract, will become a part thereof.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 3
Any verbal information obtained from or statements made by representatives of the Owner or Architect at the time of examination of the contract documents or site shall not be con-strued as in any way amending the contract documents. Only such corrections or addenda as are issued in writing to all bidders shall become a part of the contract. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for verbal instructions. 5- PREPARATION OF PROPOSALS - Proposals shall be prepared only on the form pro-vided by the Architect, and all spaces left for the purpose shall be fully filled in, including alternates. All designations and prices shall be full and clearly set forth figures. In case of variations, the worded amount shall prevail. Erasures or other changes in the bid shall bear the signature of the bidder.
The bids shall be on the basis of a guaranteed sum or sums. Bidders should not add any conditions or qualifying statements, the proposal shall not contain any added recapitulation of the work to be done, nor will oral, telegraphic, or telephonic modifications of the work be considered, as otherwise the proposal may be declared irregular. Telegraphic modifications of the bid amounts will be permitted provided the hour of filing of the telegram is prior to the hour that proposals must be deposited. (See Advertisement for Bids.) 6- WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS - Any bidder may withdraw his bid at any time prior to the hour and date specified for opening. No bidder may withdraw his proposal for sixty days thereafter. 7- DEPOSIT AND OPENING OF BIDS - Proposals shall be submitted in opaque envelopes addressed to the Owner and clearly marked "PROPOSAL". There shall also appear the name of the project, and the name and address of the bidder. Proposals shall be delivered on or before the time stated in the Advertisement or notice for Bids, and at the location stated. 8- RIGHTS RESERVED BY OWNER - The Board of the Charter Township of Grand Ha-ven reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and/or qualifications, to waive any irregularities, informalities or defects in the documentation, to accept any bid in whole or in part, which it shall deem to be in the best interest of the Township, and to negotiate with the successful bidder. 9- QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS - Upon request of the Architect, bidders shall promptly file with him statements setting forth previous experience, references, physical plant and equipment possessed, description of organization, financial resources, and such other evidence as may testify to ability to properly carry out the contract. 10- INSURANCE - Successful bidders will be required to furnish insurance in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and Modifications to General Conditions. Executed copies of insurance certificates in triplicate will be required.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 4
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 5
Contractor shall remove these sheets and submit bid on this form.
LOWER LEVEL FOOD SERVICE IMPROVEMENTS
FORM OF PROPOSAL FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
BMA ARCHITECTS, PC
5906 Commerce Centre Drive Suite A Muskegon, Michigan 49444
Date__________________________________
BIDDING CONTRACTOR:____________________________________________________
Having carefully examined the specifications entitled Specifications for and drawings similarly entitled, which cover the General Construction and Mechanical and Electrical trades as well as the promises and the conditions affecting the work, including addendums issued the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials called for by and in accordance with such documents for the sum of __________________________________________________________________________________________________Dollars(_________________________________) Performance Bond Costs: $__________________________________________ GENERAL ALTERNATES
_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 6
_____________________________________________________________________
VARIATIONS FROM MATERIALS SPECIFIED
The undersigned proposes the use of the materials of the manufacturers below designated for those listed in the specifications, and agrees to increase or decrease the Base Bid by the amount designated, if any or all substitutions are approved. PRODUCT MANUFACTURER ADD DEDUCT ____________________ _________ ___________________ ____________________ ____________________ _________ ___________________ ____________________ ____________________ _________ ___________________ ____________________ ____________________ _________ ___________________ ____________________ ____________________ _________ ___________________ ____________________ ____________________ _________ ___________________ ____________________
(Insert additional sheets if more space is required.) It is further agreed that if variations from materials specified are not requested herein or, if re-quested and not approved, then the materials specified shall be furnished. Accepted variations will be incorporated in the contract and no other materials will be allowed except upon written authorization of the Architect. ACCEPTANCE
If the bidder is notified of the acceptance of this proposal within sixty days after the date of the opening of bids, the undersigned agrees to execute a contract for the above work for the above stated compensation within ten days after date of notification. TIME FOR COMPLETION
The undersigned further agrees to complete all services and the installation of all work, materials and equipment provided for under this proposal within a period of ___________________ cal-endar days subsequent to the date of the contract.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 7
SUBCONTRACTORS
The prime subcontractors I will employ for this project are as follows: Plumbing Subcontractor: __Owner Provided Contractor________________________ Mechanical Subcontractor:____ Owner Provided Contractor ____________________ Electrical Subcontractor:______ Owner Provided Contractor ______________________ Acknowledgment is hereby made of receipt of the following addenda issued during the bidding period: Addenda No. ___________________ Dated ________________________ Addenda No. ___________________ Dated ________________________ Upon request within ten days after the opening of bids, the undersigned agrees to submit to the Architect a list of other subcontractors and vendors who would be employed on this project by him if he were to be awarded the General Contract. BIDDERS STATUS
(Check One) ______________Individual _________________Partnership________________Corp.
SIGNED:
_____________________________________ Contractor
BY___________________________________
POSITION_____________________________
ADDRESS_____________________________
_____________________________________
*If Partnership, state full names of Partners here: _____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 8
FAMILIAL DISCLOSURE STATEMENT (Must be completed for bid to be considered)
This bid must be accompanied by a sworn and notarized statement disclosing any familial rela-tionship between the Owner or any employee of the Bidder and any member of the Muskegon
Community College Board of Trustees.
____ No, there is not a familial relationship between the Owner or any employee of the Bidder and any member of the Spring Lake Township Board of Trustees.
____ Yes, there is a familial relationship between the Owner or any employee of the Bidder
and a member of the Spring Lake Township Board of Trustees. The person(s) and re-lationship are as follows:
Bidder Board of Trustees
___________________________________ _______________________________________ ___________________________________ _______________________________________ ___________________________________ _______________________________________ ___________________________________ _______________________________________ ___________________________________ _______________________________________
(Insert additional sheets if more space is required.) Subscribed and sworn this ______ day of __________________________ , 2012. In the County of _____________________ State of _________________________________ By ______________________________________ Notary Public Signature My Commission expires on: ________________________________ Seal or stamp:
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 9
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS AND MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1.1 - STANDARD A.I.A. FORMS - The General Conditions of the contract for Con-struction, Standard Form A-201, 2007 edition of the American Institute of Architects, are hereby made a part of the specifications to the same extent as if bound herein. The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions will become part of the contract and will apply to all contractors and subcontractors. Copies of the General Conditions may be examined at the Architect’s office or may be secured from the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, Washington, D.C. 20006.
1.1.2 - MODIFICATIONS OF STANDARD FORM - Modifications of Standard Form, the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, shall be as follows:
A. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES – In amplification of ART. 3.12: "The Contractor shall check and approve and submit with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or that of any other contractor, 4 copies of all shop drawings or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades, and the Archi-tect shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, making desired corrections, in-cluding all necessary corrections relating to the artistic effect. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and file with him four corrected copies for ap-proval. The Architect's review of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the con-tractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications unless he has in writing called the Architect's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in Shop Drawings or Sched-ules. Review of shop drawings shall be regarded as review of design only and the Archi-tect does not thereby assume responsibility for errors or omissions or work which does not conform to the true intent of the plans and specifications. Samples shall be provided when requested or called for in the Specifications".
B. PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES - In amplification of ART. 3.7: "The Contractor shall secure and pay for all fees and licenses necessary for the proper ex-ecution of the completion of the work". This includes any demolition and/or any erosion control permits.
The Building Permit will be furnished and paid for by the General Contractor.
C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Contractor's Liability Insurance: Contractor shall maintain in force such insur-ance with the coverages and limits set forth in the MCC RFP Front End.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 10
Each construction or work contract should provide a Hold-Harmless Clause simi-lar to the following: "The Contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless the Owner, Architect and Engineer, their agents or employees, from and against all loss or exposure (in-cluding costs and attorney's fees) by reason of liability imposed by law upon the Owner, Architect or Engineer for damages because of bodily injury (including death at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by any person or Persons) or on account of damage to property other than that of the Company's property being worked upon by this contract, including loss of use thereof, arising out of or in consequence of the performance of this work, whether such injuries to persons or damage to such property is due to or claimed to be due to the negligence of the Contractor, his employees, his Subcontractors, the Owner, Architect or Engineer, their agents and employees, except only such injury or damage as shall be occa-sioned by the sole negligence of the Owner, Architect or Engineer”. If the Hold Harmless clause is not incorporated as part of the contract, the con-tractor should be required to have the Township, including its officers and em-ployees shall be named as an "additional named insured" on the successful re-spondent’s policy.
A certificate of insurance pursuant to the foregoing should be filed with the Owner the Architect; in no case shall construction commence until certificates of insurance are provided.
The certificates shall provide for thirty (30) days written notice to the Owner of any material change in or cancellation of insurance.
2. Fire and Extended Coverage: The Owner will carry Fire and Extended Cover-age Insurance under a form of Builders Risk Coverage on the building and its in-stallations and materials for the building. The policy shall include vandalism and malicious mischief.
1.2 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1.2.1 - NOTICE - The conditions of this division are supplemental to and in amplifi-cation of the General Conditions and modifications to the General Conditions.
1.2.2 - EXAMINATION OF THE SITE, MEASUREMENTS AND LEVELS
A. Bidders shall visit the site of the work, compare the drawings and specifications with any work in the place, and inform themselves of all conditions, including other work, if any, being performed. Failure to visit the site will in no way relieve the suc-cessful bidder from the necessity of furnishing any materials or performing any work
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 11
that may be required to complete the work in accordance with the contract documents without additional cost to the Owner. B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the correct installation of his work to comply with the plans and specifications. Sidewalks, drives, etc., which are dam-aged or broken by the work shall be replaced by the contractor who is responsible. C. The General Contractor shall indicate finished floor levels where required or di-rected by the Architect, by means of distinctive markings on walls, columns or other permanent parts of the structure.
1.2.3 - LAYING OUT OF WORK - The General Contractor shall immediately locate all general reference points and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction; lay out his work and be responsible for all lines, elevations and measurements of build-ing, grading, paving, utilities and other work executed by him under the contract. He must exercise proper precaution to verify figures shown on drawings before laying out work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from his failure to exercise such precautions. He shall maintain at the work at all times a surveyor's level in good repair. 1.2.4 - PROTECTION OF PUBLIC - Contractor shall assume responsibility for main-taining suitable posted barricades and fences as may be required to protect the public at all times from the hazards of the building operations. 1.2.5 - CHARGE OF BUILDING - The General Contractor shall assume responsibility for the general charge of the building until it is accepted by the Owner. The General Contractor will not be required to maintain a watchman unless he so desires, but it shall be clearly understood that whether or not he employs a watchman, he is responsible to the Owner for the building and for any damage not covered by his insurance. The re-sponsibilities as to insurance are noted in Division 1. Contractors leaving tools on site do so at their own risk.
1.2.6 - COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS - There must be complete co-operation between all contractors and subcontractors to insure satisfactory performance of all work. The General Contractor shall be in charge of the project and will set the pace of construction. 1.2.7 - SKILLED LABOR
A. All labor on this project shall be done by skilled mechanics, qualified and compe-tent to perform the best grade of workmanship. The workmanship shall be of the highest quality in every respect, as usually recog-nized in the building industry. All surfaces, members, frames and units shall be true, even and in alignment. Connections shall be true, tight and neat. If inferior work-manship is employed, the work shall be done over to conform to the highest quality standards of the trades concerned.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 12
B. Each contractor and subcontractor shall provide a competent foreman at the job who shall be responsible for taking instructions from the Architect and directing the installation of the contractor's work. Such foreman and/or superintendent shall be ap-proved by the Architect and shall be replaced only with his permission.
1.2.8 - LOCAL LABOR AND MATERIALS - Each contractor shall give preference to the employment of local labor and purchase of materials locally where same are available at prices equivalent to those obtainable elsewhere. 1.2.9 - MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS - All materials, items, equipment, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' specifications, applicable when not otherwise specified. 1.2.10 - DISCREPANCIES - Should the contract documents disagree, the better quality or larger quantity of materials or work shall be included in the bid and, unless otherwise ordered in writing, shall be furnished by the Contractor. 1.2.11 - STANDARD CODES - Reference made to standard specifications or codes re-fer to the latest editions unless otherwise specified. All equipment, material and work-manship shall comply with requirements of applicable was, codes, regulations and ordi-nances, and meet approval of inspection authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2.12 - ARCHITECTS AND REPRESENTATIVES - Where the word "Architect" is used in this specification, it shall be interpreted to mean BMA Architects, P.C or his au-thorized representative. The Architect's representative is also the Owner's representative in all matters where the Owner is referred to in these specifications. 1.2.13 - CONTRACTORS' MEETINGS - The Architect or his representative may elect to designate a specific hour and day occurring in each week to conduct meetings on the job. The Contractor and Subcontractor are required to be present or represented at these meetings when duly notified, and decisions rendered and instructions given at such meetings shall be binding on the Contractor and subcontractors, the Contractor being re-sponsible for informing his subcontractors of decisions made or instructions given. The Architect or his representative shall preside at these meeting to occur not more often than one each week, for the purpose of discussing and deciding on the progress of the work. 1.2.14 - ORDERS FOR MATERIALS - In order to insure the Owner against delay on the part of the Contractor caused by shortage of materials, the Architect or his repre-sentative shall have authority to require the Contractor and all subcontractors to give the description of and the date of ordering materials, and such other proof of effort to in-sure reasonable delivery as the Architect may require.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 13
1.2.15 - REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED MATERIALS - Any existing sidewalks, drives, grading or parts of existing structures damaged during the course of construction shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor doing or causing the damage. 1.2.16 - VARIATIONS FROM MATERIALS SPECIFIED - Wherever materials are specified using names of specific manufacturers, the purpose is to establish a standard of quality and design and not to limit competition. Contractors desiring to use materials of manufacturers other than those specified are permitted to do so and shall indicate such materials, manufacturers and change of prices, if any, in the space provided under the heading "Variations from Materials Specified" in the Bid Sheets. Proposals of contrac-tors shall be figured only on materials specified. Variations, if accepted, will be incor-porated in the contract and the contract price adjusted accordingly, and no other materi-als will be allowed except upon written authorization of the Architect. 1.2.17 - DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS - Drawings and specifications are com-plementary and what is called for on one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Should the drawings, specifications and/or other instructions be contradictory in any par-ticular, or should there be apparent errors in either, or should there be any doubt as to the meaning of either, the Contractor shall refer the matter to the Architect, whose decision there on shall be conclusive.
Figures shall have precedence over scaled measurements and details over general draw-ings.
1.2.18 - DEFECTIVE WORK AND GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall maintain his work in good condition, and repair at his own expense any work or material which proves to be defective within one year from the time of final payment. This shall not be construed to cover misuse or abuse. B. Neither the final certificate nor payment shall relieve the Contractor of responsi-bility for negligence, faulty materials or faulty workmanship with in the period pro-vided by law and this contract. C. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting mistakes which, by reasonable check, he could have avoided. D. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials, whether worked or unworked, and take down and remove all portions of the contract work demanded by the Architect or his representative as failing to conform to the contract.
E. The Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute work in accordance with the contract and shall bear the expense of same together with the expense involved in making good all work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by each removal or replacement. If the Architect deems it expedient to accept work injured or not done
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 14
in accordance with the contract, the difference in value, making a fair allowance for damage, shall be deducted from the contract sum if acceptable to the Owner. F. All equipment and materials installed shall be new and conform with first class standards of manufacturer. Defective, damaged or substandard materials will not be acceptable and, if built in, shall be removed and replaced with sound materials or oth-erwise corrected at the Contractor's expense. G. All work items shall be completed in proper sequence and in such order that no item of construction or installation will be injured by the delayed or premature appli-cation of another.
1.2.19 - SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION - The contractors shall observe safe work habits during construction; provide barricades and lighting where necessary; keep the building free from excess trash, tools and materials which might cause accidents; and shall take all precautions as required by law and the Michigan State Safety Inspector covering the area of the project.
1.2.20 - PROVISION FOR PIPES - It is the intention to have all pipes throughout the building concealed as far as possible but accessible for repairs and adjustments. 1.2.21 - EXPANSION AND TOGGLE BOLTS - Where necessary to make attachment of any materials, fixture or equipment which may be bolted to masonry or concrete walls, floors or ceilings, all contractors shall, wherever possible, properly embed bolts in masonry or concrete for such attachment. Where not practicable, all contractors shall use suitable Ackerman-Johnson or equal expansion devices, except suitable toggle bolts shall be used where hollow tile prevent other fastening. No wood plugs shall be used under any consideration and no plastic or fiber expansion shields shall be used for any connections to masonry walls.
1.2.22 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. The General Contractor shall make out a progress schedule in quadruplicate to show the dates for the completion of various parts of the work, such as footings, foundation walls, structural frames, joists, exterior walls, roof decks, roofing and sheet metal, floor slabs, windows, glazing, interior partitions, finish carpentry, paint-ing, finish floors, grading, etc. B. This progress schedule shall be subject to approval by the Architect. It shall then be incumbent on all contractors to order materials and make installation to conform to the schedule. All agreements with subcontractors shall include deliveries and instal-lation of materials to meet this schedule. The Architect shall be privileged to check all orders of materials with the schedule and insist on it being carried out by all par-ties having orders for materials or installations to make.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 15
C. Contractors for the Mechanical and Electrical trades shall coordinate their work with the above schedule.
1.2.23 - PROGRESS PAYMENTS - Must be fully executed on AIA Documents G-702 and G-703.
A. Contractor shall file applications for monthly payment installments in triplicate with the Architect in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. Each application shall show the amount paid through previous applications, the amount retained, and the balance to be paid on the contract. B. Prior to any application for payment, the Contractor shall file with the Architect for his approval a schedule of values for the various parts of the work aggregating the contract sum. The schedule shall be in such form and in sufficient detail (with Me-chanical and Electrical breakdowns) to facilitate issuance of Certificates of Payment. This schedule shall become the basis for payments and shall accompany all applica-tions. C. Each application for payment subsequent to the first shall be accompanied by a sworn affidavit attesting that all bills for labor covered by previous applications have been paid by the contractor and all bills for material and work of subcontractors cov-ered by the previous application have been paid, less the same percent of retainage as that borne by the Contractor for that period, any exceptions being clearly stated. D. Owner shall make payments on account upon issuance of Certificates of Payment by Architect for labor and materials incorporated in the work, and for material suita-bly stored at the site up to ninety (90) percent of the value thereof.
1.2.24 - FINAL PAYMENT - Upon substantial completion of the work, Contractor shall be paid a sum sufficient to increase total payment to 98% of the contract price, and 60 days thereafter the balance, provided the work be fully completed and the contract fully performed.
The General Contractor shall furnish to the Architect two copies of a notarized Waiver of Lien for himself, the Electrical and Mechanical Contractors and two copies of a nota-rized statement from the General Contractor that all bills for labor and materials for the project have been paid.
1.2.25 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS - The low bidder shall furnish a list of subcontractors and suppliers who he will use on the project and, if requested, shall furnish the names of projects he has completed within the last five years. 1.2.26 - TIME OF COMPLETION - Work on the project shall start within 10 days after contract award. Contractors are to state in their proposals the number of calendar days required for completion of the project, which statement may be taken into considera-tion in awarding the contract.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS / INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 010000 - 16
1.2.27 - CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE - If a requested sub-bid to a prime contrac-tor changes the contract price during construction and causes an increase in the contract price, the prime contractor may add no more than ten percent (10%) to the price of the sub-bid. If the sub-bid change would cause a decrease in the contract price, the prime contractor will not be required to make any deduction greater than the sub-bid price. If any prime contractor will not abide by this special condition, he shall so state in his pro-posal. 1.2.28 - CLEANING - Contractor shall remove all rubbish, clean all new glass, replace any broken glass, remove stains, spots, marks, smears from all surfaces and clean fix-tures, leaving building and premises clean. 1.2.29 - Each Contractor shall provide facilities as required for proper storage of materi-als subject to weather damage. 1.2.30 - SEQUENCE OF WORK - Work items shall be completed in proper sequence and in such order that no item of construction or installation will be injured by the de-layed or premature application of another. The owner intends to remain in business throughout the construction project and phasing of construction to optimize; this must be considered in your bid. Work shall be planned so that the existing building is maintained secure and protect-ed from the weather at all times. Dust barriers are to be constructed with all joints taped prior to cutting or patching in the existing building.
1.2.31 - HEATING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. COLD WEATHER PROTECTION - All heating required by contractors dur-ing construction prior to the building's enclosure is classified as "Cold Weather Protection" and shall be furnished by each contractor requiring same.
END OF SECTION 01000
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the following:
1. Lump-sum allowances.
1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final
selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
use in fulfillment of each allowance.
B. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of
the Work.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to
coordinate installation.
1.5 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner
under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.
B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and
profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance
shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
1.6 UNUSED MATERIALS
A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to
Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 2
1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not
economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver
unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is
Contractor's responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Contractor shall provide an allowance of $10,000 to cover existing unknown conditions.
END OF SECTION 01210
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1
SECTION 013300 - ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting RFI’s, Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive
action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Documents will be provided
for a cost by Architect for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals.
B. All submittals must be in electronic form. Paper copies are not acceptable unless
specifically listed. The architect will review, stamp and return an electronic document for
the contractors use. Copies of the reviewed shop drawings shall be provided by the
contractor for distribution as required by the Construction Manager.
C. Compliance Certificate: Refer to the attached Compliance Certificate. Compliance
Certificates are to be used by contractors to indicate the products/devices intended for use in
this project without the need and time for product data submittals. Contractors shall use
Compliance Certificates whenever possible to expedite the work and limit paper work. Items
listed on the form must be approved products listed in the specifications. No substitutions
allowed. Select one (1) source for each category, sign this sheet, and submit as the
contractor’s commitment to use products required by the contract documents. No further
product data submittals are required for this section. Physical sample, color samples, or
layout shop drawings must be submitted where required by the specification.
D. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work
so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently
for coordination.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 2
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled
performance of related construction activities.
F. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals,
as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. RFI’s, request for information: Allow 5 working days for initial response for each
RFI. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent RFI is required, or when
additional information is need for the response.
2. Shop drawings, sample and product data:
a. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
b. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
c. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
d. Sequential Review: where sequential review of submittals by Architect’s
consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of
each submittal.
e. Submissions that are large or of multiple submissions or requires detailed or
lengthy review by the Architect or his consultant may require additional time.
f. Submissions for products or material that require a long lead time for delivery shall
be noted as such and marked “Top Priority” so the architect may expedite the
process. The architect will expedite reviews when the contractor legitimately can’t
submit within a reasonable time due to construction schedule. Failure to submit in
a timely manner or to allow sufficient time for initial review and resubmital
reviews may result in project delays, additional service charges by the architect, or
other penalties for the contractor.
G. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 3
a) Project name.
b) Date.
c) Name and address of Architect.
d) Name and address of Contractor.
e) Name and address of subcontractor.
f) Name and address of supplier.
g) Name of manufacturer.
h) Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
1. Submittal number shall use Specification Section number
another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).
i) Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k) Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l) Other necessary identification.
H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the
Contract Documents on submittals.
I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial
submittal may serve as final submittal.
J. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken
and will be returned.
K. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form including electronic submittals.
Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than the Construction Manager.
Architect will return any submittal with a transmittal, which doesn’t fully list, and properly
identify the enclosed items.
L. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
4. Note date and content of previous submittal.
5. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate
6. Resubmit submittals until they are marked " Review or reviewed with
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 4
M. Distribution: Furnish copies of reviewed submittals to the Construction Manager,
manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having
jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show
distribution on transmittal forms.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following
conditions:
1. The Architect will provide, for a fee, electronic data files, compatible with AutoCAD
for contractors convenience and use in the preparation of shop drawings. Requests for
electronic data and fee quote shall be in written form through the architect. Prior to
the release of electronic files, the Architect will require a signed waiver of release and
payment of the fee. Contractors should allow a minimum of 1-week for this process.
PART 2 - RFI’S – REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
1. All RFI’s shall be submitted to the Architect in electronic form. PDF’s and Word files
are acceptable.
2. PDF RFI forms shall include an editable text area for response, date, and signature.
3. RFI’s shall be distributed by e-mail. E-mail title shall be specific to job name, and RFI
number. This is mandatory for proper tracking.
4. Faxed and Hand written RFI’s are not acceptable and will be rejected.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction
and type of product or equipment.
1. Use the Material Compliance form when permitted and whenever possible
2. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard
3. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
4. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 5
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
i. Testing by recognized testing agency.
5. Number of Copies: Submit one electronic copy of Product Data, unless otherwise
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not
base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal,
and control wiring.Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings,
3. Number of Copies: Submit one opaque (bond) copy, and one electronic copy
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 6
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
2. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for
quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample
sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each
set.
3. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units
or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected
from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with
options selected.
4. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner
specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and
that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but
are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively
used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and
components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain
one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one
returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.
3.2 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,
submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit four copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible
design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be
designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in
the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 7
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions prior to
submission for review. It is the contractor’s responsibility to review and identify major
discrepancy with the contract dements, and significant missing information. Documents
with discrepancies and substantially missing information shall be returned for revisions prior
to submission to the Construction Manager.
B. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to the Construction Manager.
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project
name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of
reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been
reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's and Construction
Managers approval stamp, and have not been fully reviewed and will return them without
action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections
or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action
stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Reviewed with no exceptions.
2. Reviewed with exceptions.
3. Revise and resubmit.
4. Rejected.
C. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned
without review.
D. Incomplete submittals with substantial missing information, will be considered non-
responsive, and will be returned without review.
E. Non-complaint submittals, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without
review.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and will be
discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ARCHITECT’S SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 8
Material Compliance Form
Name of Building:
Owner:
Bid Package #:
Material Compliance Submittal Section:
This document is to be used by this contractor to indicate the products/devices intended for use in this
project without the need for product data submittals. Items listed are approved products in the
specifications. No substitutions allowed. Select one (1) source for each category, sign this sheet, and
submit as the contractor’s commitment to use products required by the contract documents. No further
product data submittals are required for this section. However, physical sample, color samples, or layout shop drawings must be submitted where required by the specification.
As contractor for work specified under the section named above, I agree to use only the products/devices
listed below that were listed in the specification section.
Contractor:
Date:
Print Name:
Signature: ________________________
Reviewed By: Construction Manager, Inc. Reviewed By: BMA Architects P.C.
Date: Date:
Print Name: Print Name:
Signature: ________________________ Signature: __________________________
List the manufacturer’s name and model number(s) below for each item being submitted in this division.
Provide all relevant information not covered by the model number to show full compliance with each
requirement of the specification. This will include but is not limited to color, finish, size, thickness and
all other selectable option. Note: Use location for each listed item when several different products in this
division are used in specific locations.
Manufacturer’s Name: Model Number: Additional Information:
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2
F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of [five] previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar
with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect [seven] days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities
having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24]hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496.15
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 1
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,
and final cleaning.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that
location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 2
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 3
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted
surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 4
D. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by [land surveyor] or
[professional engineer], that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately
positioned as shown on the survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or
with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 5
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 6
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5
END OF SECTION 01770
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 1
SECTION 017810 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 2
2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Owner ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition
and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility
services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
B. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic
Documentation." Submit before Work begins.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under
a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for
reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is
indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
BMA Architect P.C. 1496-15
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
B. See Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and
curbing.
C. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution:
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive
elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
BMA Architect P.C. 1496-15
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and
have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to
ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
BMA Architect P.C. 1496-15
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3
E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant :
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; 898 NTS.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.
c. Tremco; Tremsil 600
d. Dow Cornig: 786 Mildew Resistant.
e. Nuco Industries; NuFlex 302.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated
with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel and ceramic tile.
6. Application: Interior wet and sanitary areas such as; locker rooms, showers, toilet rooms,
clean rooms, etc. Provide between construction materials and around fixtures where
adjacent to floors and walls.
F. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; Dyna Trol II.
b. Tremco; Dymetric 240.
c. Polymeric systems, Inc. Flexiprene 1000.
d. Sika Corp. Sikaflex – 2c NS
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-
performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite, limestone, marble ceramic
tile, wood and coated glass.
6. Applications: Exterior Joints in masonry, metal and between.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant : Comply with ASTM C 834, Type O P, Grade NF.
1. Available Products:
a. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+ Silicone.
c. Bostik Inc,.
d. ITW Polymer Sealants
e. BASF Building Systems, Sonneborn, Division
2. Applications: Interior joints at masonry, gypsum drywall and between each other
including all interior joints not indicated otherwise.
BMA Architect P.C. 1496-15
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by
testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
c. Ohio Sealant, Inc. Pro-series SC-170 Rubber
2. Application: Interior joints at base sound sealant. Gypsum drywall and masonry, concrete
and between each other, including all interior joints in an acoustically rated wall assembly
not indicated otherwise.
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures
down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive
tape where applicable.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
BMA Architect P.C. 1496-15
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant.
a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil-free compressed air.
2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use
of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
BMA Architect P.C. 1496-15
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and
backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant
with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products
in which joints occur.
END OF SECTION 079200
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard hollow metal frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at according
to NFPA 252.
B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or
UL 9Label each individual glazed lite.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
5. Firedoor Corporation.
6. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
7. Kewanee Corporation (The).
8. Mesker Door Inc.
9. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
10. Security Metal Products Corp.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2
11. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
12. Windsor Republic Doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum [A40 (ZF120)] metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
G. Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing."
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is
indicated.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet
C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
2. Masonry Type: Manufactures recommendation.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.
C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 16 electrical Sections.
D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and
type of installation indicated.
2.6 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pre-
treating.
1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
2. Galvanized at all exterior frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5
B. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each
corner.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
3. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated.
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at according to
NFPA 252.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
3. Eggers Industries.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2
4. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood.
6. Marlite.
7. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
8. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
9. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
10. VT Industries Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-
protection rating indicated.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
C. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved
for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.
2. Species: Match existing: Maple. Verify in field.
3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced)
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
7. Core: Particleboard: ANSI 4208.0, Grade LD-2.
8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3
2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Metal Louvers:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, factory primed
for paint finish.
B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-
veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in
doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required
for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on[ top and] bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium
2. Finish: Match Existing, Submit manufactures full range for selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting
and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
END OF SECTION 081416
BMA Architects, P.C.. 1496-15
ROLLING GRILLES 083300 - 1
SECTION 083300
ROLLING GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Refer to attached Cut Sheets for Selected Basis of Design Rolling Grill System.
END OF SECTION 083320
CRESTWOOD INDUSTRIAL PARKMOUNTAINTOP, PA 18707PHONE (570) 474-6773WWW.CORNELLIRON.COM
LEED® RECYCLED CONTENT INFO FOR JOB:621.0 Lbs. - Total Weight of All Units74.0 Lbs., 11.9% - Post Consumer Content108.0 Lbs., 17.4% - Post Industrial Content182.0 Lbs., 29.3% - Total Recycled Content
DATE: 4/23/2015
PROJECT: MCCLOCATION: Meskegon, MI
DEALER: PARTITION SYSTEMS, INC. PHONE: 616-696-1300ADDRESS: 12165 Northland Drive Cedar Springs, MI 49319ATTN: Scott Baker CORNELL #: E949641 - Submittal
Bo
tto
m B
ar -
Ho
od
-
Pla
in
S
te
el -
QU
AN
TIT
Y &
M
AR
K:
See draw
ing # for guide detail.
EL
EC
TR
IC
AL
E
QU
IP
ME
NT
L
IS
T:
MO
TO
R S
PE
CIF
IC
AT
IO
NS
:
RE
VIS
IO
ND
AT
EB
Y
OR
IG
IN
AL
D
RA
WIN
G
01
-2
8-2
01
5
BS
E_
GR
LR
#
---
JO
B:
MO
DE
L #
:
JO
B #
:
AG
EN
T:
CO
NT
RA
CT
OR
:
AR
CH
IT
EC
T:
EL
EV
AT
IO
N (C
OIL
S
ID
E) A
ND
S
EC
TIO
N V
IE
W
MA
TE
RIA
L &
F
IN
IS
H:
Cu
rta
in
-
CU
RR
EN
T C
HA
RA
CT
ER
IS
TIC
S:
HZ
Ele
ctrica
l cu
rre
nt m
us
t b
e ve
rifie
d in
w
ritin
g b
efo
re
jo
b is
re
le
ase
d fo
r m
an
ufa
ctu
re
; cu
rre
nt ve
rifie
d a
nd
fo
un
d co
rre
ct.
Sig
ne
d:
VP
H60
DIS
TA
NC
E B
ET
WE
EN
G
UID
ES
OP
EN
IN
G W
ID
TH
RO
LLIN
G G
RILLE
OVERALL DOOR HEIGHT
DOOR OPENING HEIGHT
PR
OD
UC
T C
OD
E:
2 11/16"
2 11/16"
R
ollin
g G
rille
Gu
id
es
-
BO
TT
OM
B
AR
L
OC
KIN
G:
5"
EX
TR
UD
ED
AL
UM
IN
UM
BO
TT
OM
B
AR
SA
FE A
ND
SE
CU
RE
ww
w.co
rn
elliro
n.co
m
Typ
e 6
DM
I T
ub
e M
oto
r O
pe
ra
te
d
4"±
ST
OP
PE
RS
CE
IL
IN
G L
IN
E
CO
IL
A
CC
ES
S
RE
QU
IR
ED
(B
Y O
TH
ER
S)
CO
IL
A
RE
A
(H
OO
D N
OT
R
EQ
UIR
ED
)
RE
MO
VA
BL
E
HA
ND
C
RA
NK
CO
TT
ER
PIN
Typ
e 6
DM
I T
ub
e M
oto
r, 8
80
in
s.lb
s. to
rq
ue
w
ith m
an
ual o
ve
rride
opera
tion, pro
gre
ssive lim
it setting
, b
uilt in
electric b
rake an
d 6
fee
t o
f m
otor
cab
le. A
n au
xiliary h
an
d crank is p
rovide
d as sta
nd
ard. U
nit in
clu
de
s
adjustab
le ad
ap
to
rs cap
ab
le of m
oun
ting w
ithin 4
" pip
e &
4-1
/2" tub
ing
.
UL recog
nized
, C
SA
ap
prove
d an
d IP
44
ra
te
d.
ES
G1
0M
BT
V
9 0
0A
A
E 0
09
49
64
1 0
01
B
04
/2
3/1
5
PA
RT
IT
IO
N S
YS
TE
MS
, IN
C.
MC
C 2
21
Q
UA
RT
ER
LIN
E R
D
ME
SK
EG
ON
, M
I
(1
)
TU
B M
OT
OR
8'-0"
9'-9"
11'-10"
12'-3 3/8"
16"
16"
Alu
min
um
, cle
ar a
no
dize
d 2
04
-R
1
Extru
de
d a
lu
min
um
, cle
ar a
no
dize
d 2
04
-R
1
Extru
de
d a
lu
min
um
, cle
ar a
no
dize
d 2
04
-R
1
NO
H
OO
D R
EQ
'D
Po
wd
er co
ate
d g
ra
y
4" M
IN
IM
UM
SL
OT
R
EQ
D
IN
C
EIL
IN
G
1 - K
ey sw
itch
sta
tio
n, flu
sh
m
ou
nte
d w
/ B
est cylin
de
r.
1 - R
ocke
r sw
itch
2
p
ositio
n `O
PE
N-C
LO
SE
` co
nsta
nt p
re
ssu
re
NO
TE
: O
pe
ra
tin
g sta
tio
n sh
ou
ld
b
e w
ith
in
sig
ht o
f g
rille
.
120
160
PLA
N O
F O
PE
NIN
G
CO
NT
RA
CT
OR
:
AR
CH
IT
EC
T:
AG
EN
T:
JO
B:
JO
B #
:
RE
VIS
IO
ND
AT
EB
Y
OR
IG
IN
AL
D
RA
WIN
G
GG
R_
LE
GD
#
---
MO
DE
L #
:
DIS
TA
NC
E B
ET
WE
EN
G
UID
ES
OP
EN
IN
G W
ID
TH
03
-1
9-2
01
4
GR
IL
LE
G
UID
E W
IT
H
PO
LY
PR
OP
YL
EN
E
P
IL
E L
IN
IN
G
RO
LL
IN
G G
RIL
LE
G
UID
E A
SS
EM
BL
Y
2-1
/2
" P
AC
KO
FF
9"
2"
GR
ILLE
C
UR
TA
IN
V9 2" S
PA
CIN
G
2 1
/2
"
PA
CK
OF
F
#7
G
A. S
TE
EL
B
RA
CK
ET
P
LA
TE
A
BO
VE
2 1
/2
"
PA
CK
OF
F
AT
M
AX
IM
UM
3
0" O
N C
EN
TE
R
- 3
/8
" X
1
7
/8
" H
EX
N
UT
S
LE
EV
E A
NC
HO
RS
WA
LL
F
AS
TE
NE
RS
:
GA
0073 - 2 1/2"
3/4
"
2 1
1/1
6"
2 1
1/1
6"
GU
ID
E
TR
IM
2-1
/2
" x #
7 G
A.
ST
EE
L F
LA
T
5/8
"
AT
M
AX
IM
UM
3
0" O
N C
EN
TE
R
- 3
/8
" X
1
7
/8
" H
EX
N
UT
S
LE
EV
E A
NC
HO
RS
3/4
"
2 1
1/1
6"
2 1
1/1
6"
WA
LL
F
AS
TE
NE
RS
:
GU
ID
E
TR
IM
GA
0073 - 2 1/2"
2-1
/2
" x #
7 G
A.
ST
EE
L F
LA
T
5/8
"
PR
OD
UC
T C
OD
E:
NO
TE
: W
all co
nstru
ctio
n d
eta
il sh
ow
n is fo
r illu
stra
tive
p
urp
ose
s o
nly a
nd
d
oe
s n
ot im
ply co
mp
lia
nce
w
ith
b
uild
in
g
re
qu
ire
me
nts. W
all co
nstru
ctio
n a
nd
clo
su
re
in
sta
lla
tio
n
sh
all b
e in
a
cco
rd
an
ce
w
ith
th
e lo
ca
l a
uth
ority h
avin
g
ju
risd
ictio
n re
qu
ire
me
nts.
SA
FE A
ND
SE
CU
RE
ww
w.co
rn
elliro
n.co
m
ES
G1
0M
BT
V
9 0
0A
A
04
/2
3/1
5
PA
RT
IT
IO
N S
YS
TE
MS
, IN
C.
MC
C 2
21
Q
UA
RT
ER
LIN
E R
D
ME
SK
EG
ON
, M
I
11'-10"
12'-3 3/8"
MK
: T
UB
M
OT
OR
Bo
tto
m B
ar -
Ho
od
-
Pla
in
S
te
el -
QU
AN
TIT
Y &
M
AR
K:
See draw
ing # for guide detail.
EL
EC
TR
IC
AL
E
QU
IP
ME
NT
L
IS
T:
MO
TO
R S
PE
CIF
IC
AT
IO
NS
:
RE
VIS
IO
ND
AT
EB
Y
OR
IG
IN
AL
D
RA
WIN
G
01
-2
8-2
01
5
BS
E_
GR
LR
#
---
JO
B:
MO
DE
L #
:
JO
B #
:
AG
EN
T:
CO
NT
RA
CT
OR
:
AR
CH
IT
EC
T:
EL
EV
AT
IO
N (C
OIL
S
ID
E) A
ND
S
EC
TIO
N V
IE
W
MA
TE
RIA
L &
F
IN
IS
H:
Cu
rta
in
-
PU
SH
-U
P O
PE
RA
TE
D
DIS
TA
NC
E B
ET
WE
EN
G
UID
ES
OP
EN
IN
G W
ID
TH
RO
LLIN
G G
RILLE
OVERALL DOOR HEIGHT
DOOR OPENING HEIGHT
(H
OO
D N
OT
R
EQ
UIR
ED
)
CO
IL
A
RE
A
ST
OP
PE
RS
PU
LL
D
OW
N
PO
LE
CE
IL
IN
G L
IN
E
CO
IL
A
CC
ES
S
RE
QU
IR
ED
(B
Y O
TH
ER
S)
SP
RIN
G
AD
JU
ST
OR
PR
OD
UC
T C
OD
E:
2 11/16"
2 11/16"
R
ollin
g G
rille
Gu
id
es
-
BO
TT
OM
B
AR
L
OC
KIN
G:
5"
EX
TR
UD
ED
AL
UM
IN
UM
BO
TT
OM
B
AR
SA
FE A
ND
SE
CU
RE
ww
w.co
rn
elliro
n.co
m
"S
UP
PO
RT
T
O R
UN
T
O T
OP
O
F C
OIL"
ES
G1
0P
BG
V
6 0
0A
A
E 0
09
49
64
1 0
02
B
04
/2
3/1
5
PA
RT
IT
IO
N S
YS
TE
MS
, IN
C.
MC
C 2
21
Q
UA
RT
ER
LIN
E R
D
ME
SK
EG
ON
, M
I
(1
)
PU
SH
U
P
8'-0"
9'-9"
12'-0"
12'-5 3/8"
16"
16"
Alu
min
um
, cle
ar a
no
dize
d 2
04
-R
1
Extru
de
d a
lu
min
um
, cle
ar a
no
dize
d 2
04
-R
1
Extru
de
d a
lu
min
um
, cle
ar a
no
dize
d 2
04
-R
1
NO
H
OO
D R
EQ
'D
Po
wd
er co
ate
d g
ra
y
4" M
IN
IM
UM
SL
OT
R
EQ
D
IN
C
EIL
IN
G
PLA
N O
F O
PE
NIN
G
CO
NT
RA
CT
OR
:
AR
CH
IT
EC
T:
AG
EN
T:
JO
B:
JO
B #
:
RE
VIS
IO
ND
AT
EB
Y
OR
IG
IN
AL
D
RA
WIN
G
GG
R_
LE
GD
#
---
MO
DE
L #
:
DIS
TA
NC
E B
ET
WE
EN
G
UID
ES
OP
EN
IN
G W
ID
TH
03
-1
9-2
01
4
GR
IL
LE
G
UID
E W
IT
H
PO
LY
PR
OP
YL
EN
E
P
IL
E L
IN
IN
G
RO
LL
IN
G G
RIL
LE
G
UID
E A
SS
EM
BL
Y
2-1
/2
" P
AC
KO
FF
GR
ILLE
C
UR
TA
IN
V6 2" S
PA
CIN
G
6"
2"
2 1
/2
"
PA
CK
OF
F
#7
G
A. S
TE
EL
B
RA
CK
ET
P
LA
TE
A
BO
VE
2 1
/2
"
PA
CK
OF
F
AT
M
AX
IM
UM
3
0" O
N C
EN
TE
R
- 3
/8
" X
1
7
/8
" H
EX
N
UT
S
LE
EV
E A
NC
HO
RS
WA
LL
F
AS
TE
NE
RS
:
GA
0073 - 2 1/2"
3/4
"
2 1
1/1
6"
2 1
1/1
6"
GU
ID
E
TR
IM
2-1
/2
" x #
7 G
A.
ST
EE
L F
LA
T
5/8
"
AT
M
AX
IM
UM
3
0" O
N C
EN
TE
R
- 3
/8
" X
1
7
/8
" H
EX
N
UT
S
LE
EV
E A
NC
HO
RS
3/4
"
2 1
1/1
6"
2 1
1/1
6"
WA
LL
F
AS
TE
NE
RS
:
GU
ID
E
TR
IM
GA
0073 - 2 1/2"
2-1
/2
" x #
7 G
A.
ST
EE
L F
LA
T
5/8
"
PR
OD
UC
T C
OD
E:
NO
TE
: W
all co
nstru
ctio
n d
eta
il sh
ow
n is fo
r illu
stra
tive
p
urp
ose
s o
nly a
nd
d
oe
s n
ot im
ply co
mp
lia
nce
w
ith
b
uild
in
g
re
qu
ire
me
nts. W
all co
nstru
ctio
n a
nd
clo
su
re
in
sta
lla
tio
n
sh
all b
e in
a
cco
rd
an
ce
w
ith
th
e lo
ca
l a
uth
ority h
avin
g
ju
risd
ictio
n re
qu
ire
me
nts.
SA
FE A
ND
SE
CU
RE
ww
w.co
rn
elliro
n.co
m
ES
G1
0P
BG
V
6 0
0A
A
04
/2
3/1
5
PA
RT
IT
IO
N S
YS
TE
MS
, IN
C.
MC
C 2
21
Q
UA
RT
ER
LIN
E R
D
ME
SK
EG
ON
, M
I
12'-0"
12'-5 3/8"
MK
: P
US
H U
P
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an
independent testing agency.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm)
diameter.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main
beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0359 inch
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel
stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
b. Tile backing panels: [16 inches (406 mm)] [400 mm] o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in
finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches (150 mm) o.c.
D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
B. Regular Type:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2
C. Type X:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation,
through-penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard, regular-type and Type X
gypsum board.
1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. PROVIDE AT ALL AREAS TO RECEIVE 5/8” GYPSUM TO A HEIGHT OF 4’-0”
A.F.F., EXCEPT ON THE CONDITION THAT GYPSUM IS COVERED WITH
CASEWORK. REFER TO DRAWING DOCUMENTS.
F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. Expansion (control) joint.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-
type, sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4
locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
3.2 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or
structural penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by
Architect for visual effect.
3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM
C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
D. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements;
formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of
suspension system runners.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated in the schedule at the end of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install
carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
C.
1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into
concrete slabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at
intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends,
leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m).
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3
3.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL SCHEDULE
A. Refer to drawing documents for specified ceiling tiles.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Gypsum board.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material
and color applied.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a
fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3
y. Vinyl chloride.
2.2 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.
D. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
2.6 LATEX PAINTS
A. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4).
B. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).
C. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1).
D. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg).
2.7 ALKYD PAINTS
A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4
2.8 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
2.9 DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS
A. Waterborne Dry Fall: MPI #133.
2.10 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (satin).
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6
1. Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2F.
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based).
b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based).
C. CMU Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.2D.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (Sherwin Williams- Pro Mar 200,
(semigloss) as Basis of Design).
D. Steel Substrates:
1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.1C.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Topcoat: Waterborne dry fall.
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd semigloss.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C.
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss).
F. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex satin (Sherwin Williams- Pro Mar
200, (semigloss) as Basis of Design).
G. Walls at Toilet Rooms and Kitchens:
1. High performance epoxy coating system.
a. Water based epoxy MPI #115.
H. Steel Doors and Frames
BMA Architects, P.C. 1496-15
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7
1. Interior alkyd (semi-gloss) MPI #47.
3.4 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE:
Sherwin-Williams SW6140 Moderate White, semi gloss for the kitchen and egg shell
for the Lactate Room. Approved Equal - O’Leary Paint, match SW color.
END OF SECTION 099123
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 1
SECTION 114000 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Please refer to the attached cut sheets for selected equipment.
NOTE:
All equipment will be pre-purchased by the Owner, stored on site and available for construction as
indicated on project schedule. General Contractor shall coordinate all installation and hookups as
applicable. Refer to drawing documents for Owners Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing
contractors to be utilized as required.
END OF SECTION 01210
: Project: :Muskegon Community College221 Quarterline RoadMuskegon, MI 49442
13MCC_Delfield Stafford Smith, Inc.Mike Van de Bogert220 Lyon NWSuite 440Grand Rapids, MI 49503(616) 942‐2100 3201 (Contact)
Item Qty Description Sell Sell Total
1 1 ea COLD PAN SERVING COUNTER $5,198.04 $5,198.04Delfield Model No. SCSC‐74‐B Shelleysteel™ Cold Food Serving Counter, 65" x 21.62" x 7" deepBloomington style cold pan, drain with valve, reinforced stainless steelenclosed base, 5" casters, self‐contained refrigeration, R404A, 1/4 hp,cUL, UL, NSF
1 ea 36" standard height1 ea 115v/60/1‐ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5‐15P, standard1 ea B‐74 Tray slide1 ea F‐LINE UP F‐line up connector1 ea KS‐74 Sneeze Guard, single service, flip‐up $797.40 $797.40
ITEM TOTAL: $5,995.441A 1 ea COLD PAN SERVING COUNTER $5,859.36 $5,859.36
Delfield Model No. SCSC‐74‐B Shelleysteel™ Cold Food Serving Counter, 65" x 21.62" x 7" deepBloomington style cold pan, drain with valve, reinforced stainless steelenclosed base, 5" casters, self‐contained refrigeration, R404A, 1/4 hp,cUL, UL, NSF
1 ea 36" standard height1 ea 115v/60/1‐ph, 7.0 amps, NEMA 5‐15P, standard1 ea B‐74 Tray slide1 ea F‐LINE UP F‐line up connector1 ea B‐74 Tray slide1 ea KD‐74 Sneeze Guard, double service, flip‐up $1,092.24 $1,092.24
ITEM TOTAL: $6,951.602 1 ea UTILITY SERVING COUNTER $4,295.16 $4,295.16
Delfield Model No. SC‐60‐NU Shelleysteel™ Solid Top Serving Counter, 60" long, 14 gauge stainlesssteel counter top, enclosed base, 5" swivel casters, NSF
1 ea SG20‐A Refrigerated understorage only, fits in 60" or longer units, singledoor, with 1/4 hp condensing unit
3 1 ea CASH REGISTER STAND $3,872.88 $3,872.88
Quote04/23/2015
13MCC_Delfield Muskegon Community CollegeInitial: ______
Page 1 of 4
Item Qty Description Sell Sell Total
Delfield Model No. SCS‐50 Shelleysteel™ Cashier Counter, 50" deep, stainless steel top, lockingcash drawer, shelf, & base, 5" swivel casters, NSF
2 ea B‐50 Tray Slide, 12", V fold‐down, 14 gauge stainless steel1 ea Q‐115 115 volt outlet1 ea SG5E Intermediate shelf.
4 1 ea DISHWASHER, DOOR TYPE $11,510.10 $11,510.10Champion Model No. DH‐5000‐DV Genesis Dishwasher, door type, high temperature, direct vent systemincluding fan, built in rinse sentry booster for 40‐70° rise, fieldconvertible from straight through to corner, field convertible fromsingle phase to three phase, auto start when hood is closed, singlepoint electrical connection, 1 hp self draining pump & motor, 46racks/hour capacity, automatic tank fill, detergent/chemicalconnections, interchangeable upper and lower spray arms, automaticdrain valve, vent fan control, bottom mounted digital controls,mounted PRV, sloped hood, stainless steel construction , NSF, cULus,ENERGY STAR®
1 ea One year limited warranty, standard1 ea 208v/60/3‐ph1 ea Straight‐through design application1 ea Drain water tempering kit (mounted at factory) $747.50 $747.501 ea Shock arrestor (unmounted) $49.61 $49.611 ea Door interlock switch (locks doors closed during the vent fan cycle) $214.99 $214.99
ITEM TOTAL: $12,522.205 1 ea DISHWASHER, DOOR TYPE $3,767.24 $3,767.24
Champion Model No. DL‐2000 Dishwasher, door type, low temperature, 40 racks/160 covers per hourcapacity, top mount controls with built‐in chemical pumps, autostart/stop, auto‐fill, convertible corner to straight & straight to corner,self‐draining pump, 17" tall door opening, electric tank heat, scrap traydrain, stainless steel construction, 1HP, 16 amps, 115V/60Hz/1‐ph, NSF,ETL, UL, cUL
6 1 ea THREE (3) COMPARTMENT SINK $1,707.30 $1,707.30Advance Tabco Model No. 9‐3‐54‐18RL Regaline Sink, 3‐compartment, with left & right‐hand drainboards, 20"front‐to‐back x 16" wide sink compartments, 12" deep, with 8" highsplash, stainless steel open frame base, side crossrails, 18" drainboards,1" adjustable bullet feet, 18 gauge 304 series stainless steel, overall 27"F/B x 91" L/R, NSF
1 ea DTA‐55 Column notch (includes splash)
7 1 ea FAUCET $108.21 $108.21T&S Brass Model No. B‐0230 Sink Mixing Faucet, 18" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8" centers on sinkfaucet, with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles
Stafford Smith, Inc. 04/23/2015
13MCC_Delfield Muskegon Community CollegeInitial: ______
Page 2 of 4
Item Qty Description Sell Sell Total
Merchandise $46,466.45Freight $1,795.97Installation $1,540.00Total $49,802.42
1 ea B‐0230‐K Installation Kit , (2) 1/2" NPT nipples, lock nuts and washers,(2) short "Ell" 1/2" NPT female x male
$23.60 $23.60
ITEM TOTAL: $131.818 1 ea WORK COUNTER $2,187.78 $2,187.78
Advance Tabco Model No. HB‐SS‐305M Work Table, cabinet base with hinged doors, 30" wide, 14 gauge 304series stainless steel top, without splash, 60" long, stainless steel bulletfeet, with midshelf, NSF, NSF
1 st TA‐255P Casters, 5", threaded stem, for cabinet base units, 300 lbcapacity per caster, set of (4) (2 braked), 1/2‐13 x 3/4" thread
9 1 ea WORK COUNTER $2,325.54 $2,325.54Advance Tabco Model No. HB‐SS‐306M Work Table, cabinet base with hinged doors, 30" wide, 14 gauge 304series stainless steel top, without splash, 72" long, stainless steel bulletfeet, with midshelf, NSF, NSF
1 st TA‐255P Casters, 5", threaded stem, for cabinet base units, 300 lbcapacity per caster, set of (4) (2 braked), 1/2‐13 x 3/4" thread
10 1 ea HEATED CABINET, MOBILE $2,457.50 $2,457.50Cres Cor Model No. H‐135‐SUA‐11 Cabinet, Mobile Heated, insulated, bottom‐mount heater assembly,recessed push/pull handles, magnetic latch, (11) sets chrome platedwire, 4‐1/2" centers, adjustable 1‐1/2" centers, dutch doors, anti‐microbial latches, analog thermometer, (4) 5" swivel casters (2) braked,stainless steel construction, 1500watt, CSA
1 ea Standard Warranty: 1 yr labor, 2 yrs parts warranty1 ea 120v/60/1‐ph, 12.6 amps, standard1 ea Right‐hand door swing, standard1 ea 1056‐002 Corner Bumpers, add 2" to O.A. dimensions, non‐marking, gray $114.91 $114.911 ea 1087‐122 Push Handle $137.09 $137.09
ITEM TOTAL: $2,709.5010 1 ea DELIVERY AND SET
Custom Model No. CUSTOM We will receive the equipment, uncrate, assemble, deliver to job siteand set in place. If you want the dish washer installed we will have tomake a visit to see all that is required.
TERMS: Upon receipt of application and credit approval, terms are as follows: Signed order,
50% down payment with net balance due upon receipt of invoice unless prior arrangements have
been made with our credit department. Progressive payments will be due in full upon receipt of
invoice. This includes items shipped by the manufacturer to Stafford-Smith for storage and is not
conditional upon being installed, mechanically connected or operational. You are welcome to inspect
all stored materials.
Stafford-Smith, Inc. shall retain security interest in all equipment, parts, small wares,
accessories, attachments, additions, and any replacements of the above that have been installed,
Stafford Smith, Inc. 04/23/2015
13MCC_Delfield Muskegon Community CollegeInitial: ______
Page 3 of 4
Acceptance: Date:Printed Name:
affixed to or used in connection with the items specified in this proposal until all amounts have been
paid. Should the Buyer sell or otherwise dispose of such collateral in violation of the terms of this
agreement, Stafford-Smith, Inc. retains an interest in the proceeds from such transactions. Buyer
authorizes Stafford-Smith, Inc. to file a financing statement describing the collateral and a copy of
this agreement and/or the credit application may be filed as a security agreement for granting a
secured interest in Buyer’s inventory and sales
proceeds thereof. Past due amounts constitute a default and are subject to service charges of 1 ½%
per month, collection costs, and attorney fees.
In addition to non-payment, an act of default by the buyer will have occurred if the buyer fails
to accept the order of goods or fails to perform any other covenants under this agreement. In the
event of default, Stafford-Smith, Inc. may enter any business property and without breach of the
peace take possession of any or all collateral and exercise our rights in the event of default of a
secured party as specified under the Uniform Commercial Code. Should any disputes arise, Buyer
also acknowledges and submits to jurisdiction in the State of Michigan and County of Kalamazoo.
Except as otherwise provided herein, this proposal does not include any applicable State or
Federal taxes, any charge for electrical wiring or plumbing and is subject to acceptance by buyer
and seller within thirty (30) days from the date of this quote and only in accordance with the terms
stated.
When ordering drop-ship equipment, please be aware to inspect your order immediately upon
receipt. You may request the driver wait, for a reasonable amount of time, while you inspect and
they must comply to your request. If the driver refuses to wait, mark the receipt "driver not willing
to wait" and contact Stafford-Smith within (48) hours in order for a claim to be filed. If there is
damage, you may refuse or you can accept and note the damage. It is important to take photos, if
possible, to assist in filing the claim. You must keep all original cartons, even if you accept the
damage, so Stafford-Smith can pursue a freight claim on your behalf. Promptly send the bill of
lading and any additional documentation to your Stafford-Smith representative to initiate the
process and note that if you don’t have time to inspect when delivered, you have up to (48) hours to
inspect and notify us immediately if there is an issue so we can address the best way to handle the
claim. If not notified within (48) hours, your claim may not be valid.
I agree to the terms hereof and offer to purchase described goods and services as proposed
hereby.
Accepted by:Signature: _________________________________________Print Name and Title:________________________________________On Behalf of: _______________________________________(Full Corporate Name)Date: ________________________
Stafford-Smith, Inc. Account Executive:
Signature: _________________________________________Print Name: ____________________________________
Date: _________________________
Project Grand Total: $49,802.42
Stafford Smith, Inc. 04/23/2015
13MCC_Delfield Muskegon Community CollegeInitial: ______
Page 4 of 4
Project __________________________________
Item ____________________________________
Quantity ________________________________
CSI Section 11400
Approved _______________________________
Date ____________________________________
980 S. Isabella Rd.Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858
Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com
Shelleysteel TM
by Del�eld
Exterior body is constructed of 18-gauge stainless steel side panels and 14-gauge galvanized bottom. All exterior side panels are reinforced with overlapping corners and are welded in place. All body cutouts are reinforced with 14-gauge galvanized channel supports.
Exterior top is constructed of 14-gauge stainless steel, welded, ground and polished into one integral unit.
The refrigerated cold pan is 7” (18cm) deep and constructed of stainless steel to hold 4” deep pans. The cold pan is separated from the exterior top by a thermal break. Copper refrigeration tubing is attached to the sides of the cold pan and is fully insulated with foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane insulation. Cold pan is equipped with a 1” (2.5cm) I.P.S. drain with drain valve located at the bottom of the unit. Temperatures of 33°F (1°C) to 41°F (5°C) are maintained with pans recessed 2” (5cm) at 86°F ambient room temperature. Pans rest on die-stamped coldpan. Pans by others.
Refrigeration system uses HFC-404A refrigerant and has a self-contained 115 volt, 60 Hertz, single phase hermetically sealed condensing unit with adjustable cold pan pressure control. Unit is wired with a 3-wire, grounded, maximum 10’ (3m) cord and plug. Unit has an on/off switch mounted on the exterior.
Casters: Unit is mounted on 5” (13cm) diameter swivel casters with non-marking tires and plate brakes. Overall height of caster assembly is 6.00” (15cm).
Specifications
Standard Features Options & Accessories• On/off switch mounted to exterior of unit
• 10’ long cord and plug are standard• 5” polyurethane swivel casters for easy
cleaning• Easy to use stainless steel interlock system is
standard on base and tray slides• Environmentally friendly HFC-404A refrigerant• Counters are standard with 7” deep refrigerated
cold pan. Cold pans are fully insulated with foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane insulation
• Pans recessed 2” from top edge of counter• Enclosed base• Cold pans are standard with drain with valve• Adapter bars will be furnished at no additional
charge if requested on original order only. Pans are supplied by others
• One year parts and 90 day labor standard warranty
• SCSC-36-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 26” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-50-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 39” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-60-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 52” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-74-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 65” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-96-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 78” x 21.62” cold pan size
Models
SCSC-BMobile Self-Contained Cold Pan Serving Counters
SCSC-B: Mobile Self-Contained Cold Pan Serving Counters
• Tray slides and work shelves• Composite fold-down cutting boards• Line-up interlock device• Glass-front counter protector• Food shields• 12” (30cm) wide 18-gauge stainless
steel overshelf• Fluorescent or incandescent light
fixtures*• Open understorage with shelf• 120V/60Hz/1ø, 10 amp convenience
outlet with breaker*• Dry storage compartment — single or
double door• Refrigerated understorage (60” unit or
longer only)*• Stainless steel trim strips• 14” x 30” (36cm x 76cm) stainless steel
end drop shelf• 6” (15cm) high adjustable stainless
steel legs• Laminate exterior panels
* Inclusion of these options will alter the electrical specifications of unit
SCSC-60-B
980 S. Isabella Rd.Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858
Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619www.delfield.com
Shelleysteel TM
by Del�eldSC
SC-B
Mob
ile S
elf-
Con
tain
ed C
old
Pan
Ser
vin
g C
ount
ers
Printed in the U.S.A.DSSCSCB12/12
Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice.
Specifications
Model V/Hz/Ph Amp H.P. Nema Plug Ship Weight
SCSC-36-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 350lbs/159kg
SCSC-50-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 425lbs/193kg
SCSC-60-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 500lbs/227kg
SCSC-74-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 575lbs/261kg
SCSC-96-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 650lbs/295kg
30.00"76cm
50.00"127cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
39.00"99cm
5.50"14cm
30.00"76cm
36.00"91cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
7.00"18cmDeep
7.00"18cmDeep
7.00"18cmDeep
26.00"66cm
5.00"13cm
30.00"76cm
60.00"152cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
52.00"132cm
4.00"10cm
30.00"76cm
74.00"188cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
65.00"165cm
4.50"11cm
30.00"76cm
96.00"244cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
78.00"198cm
9.00"23cm
Plan ViewSCSC-36-B
Plan ViewSCSC-50-B
Plan ViewSCSC-60-B
Plan ViewSCSC-74-B
Plan ViewSCSC-96-B
7.00"18cmDeep
7.00"18cmDeep
1.62"4cm
36.00"91cm
6.00"15cm
13.00"33cm
1.62"4cm
0.093"2mm
Drain Valve20.00"51cm
On/o� Switch For Unit
Typical Elevation ViewAll SCSC-B Models
Typical End ViewAll SCSC-B Models
PowerSupply
Location
Project __________________________________
Item ____________________________________
Quantity ________________________________
CSI Section 11400
Approved _______________________________
Date ____________________________________
980 S. Isabella Rd.Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858
Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com
Shelleysteel TM
by Del�eld
Exterior body is constructed of 18-gauge stainless steel side panels and 14-gauge galvanized bottom. All exterior side panels are reinforced with overlapping corners and are welded in place. All body cutouts are reinforced with 14-gauge galvanized channel supports.
Exterior top is constructed of 14-gauge stainless steel, welded, ground and polished into one integral unit.
The refrigerated cold pan is 7” (18cm) deep and constructed of stainless steel to hold 4” deep pans. The cold pan is separated from the exterior top by a thermal break. Copper refrigeration tubing is attached to the sides of the cold pan and is fully insulated with foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane insulation. Cold pan is equipped with a 1” (2.5cm) I.P.S. drain with drain valve located at the bottom of the unit. Temperatures of 33°F (1°C) to 41°F (5°C) are maintained with pans recessed 2” (5cm) at 86°F ambient room temperature. Pans rest on die-stamped coldpan. Pans by others.
Refrigeration system uses HFC-404A refrigerant and has a self-contained 115 volt, 60 Hertz, single phase hermetically sealed condensing unit with adjustable cold pan pressure control. Unit is wired with a 3-wire, grounded, maximum 10’ (3m) cord and plug. Unit has an on/off switch mounted on the exterior.
Casters: Unit is mounted on 5” (13cm) diameter swivel casters with non-marking tires and plate brakes. Overall height of caster assembly is 6.00” (15cm).
Specifications
Standard Features Options & Accessories• On/off switch mounted to exterior of unit
• 10’ long cord and plug are standard• 5” polyurethane swivel casters for easy
cleaning• Easy to use stainless steel interlock system is
standard on base and tray slides• Environmentally friendly HFC-404A refrigerant• Counters are standard with 7” deep refrigerated
cold pan. Cold pans are fully insulated with foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane insulation
• Pans recessed 2” from top edge of counter• Enclosed base• Cold pans are standard with drain with valve• Adapter bars will be furnished at no additional
charge if requested on original order only. Pans are supplied by others
• One year parts and 90 day labor standard warranty
• SCSC-36-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 26” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-50-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 39” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-60-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 52” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-74-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 65” x 21.62” cold pan size
• SCSC-96-B Refrigerated cold pan serving counter, 78” x 21.62” cold pan size
Models
SCSC-BMobile Self-Contained Cold Pan Serving Counters
SCSC-B: Mobile Self-Contained Cold Pan Serving Counters
• Tray slides and work shelves• Composite fold-down cutting boards• Line-up interlock device• Glass-front counter protector• Food shields• 12” (30cm) wide 18-gauge stainless
steel overshelf• Fluorescent or incandescent light
fixtures*• Open understorage with shelf• 120V/60Hz/1ø, 10 amp convenience
outlet with breaker*• Dry storage compartment — single or
double door• Refrigerated understorage (60” unit or
longer only)*• Stainless steel trim strips• 14” x 30” (36cm x 76cm) stainless steel
end drop shelf• 6” (15cm) high adjustable stainless
steel legs• Laminate exterior panels
* Inclusion of these options will alter the electrical specifications of unit
SCSC-60-B
980 S. Isabella Rd.Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858
Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619www.delfield.com
Shelleysteel TM
by Del�eldSC
SC-B
Mob
ile S
elf-
Con
tain
ed C
old
Pan
Ser
vin
g C
ount
ers
Printed in the U.S.A.DSSCSCB12/12
Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice.
Specifications
Model V/Hz/Ph Amp H.P. Nema Plug Ship Weight
SCSC-36-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 350lbs/159kg
SCSC-50-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 425lbs/193kg
SCSC-60-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 500lbs/227kg
SCSC-74-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 575lbs/261kg
SCSC-96-B 115/60/1 7.0 1/4 5-15P 650lbs/295kg
30.00"76cm
50.00"127cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
39.00"99cm
5.50"14cm
30.00"76cm
36.00"91cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
7.00"18cmDeep
7.00"18cmDeep
7.00"18cmDeep
26.00"66cm
5.00"13cm
30.00"76cm
60.00"152cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
52.00"132cm
4.00"10cm
30.00"76cm
74.00"188cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
65.00"165cm
4.50"11cm
30.00"76cm
96.00"244cm
21.62"55cm
4.19"11cm
78.00"198cm
9.00"23cm
Plan ViewSCSC-36-B
Plan ViewSCSC-50-B
Plan ViewSCSC-60-B
Plan ViewSCSC-74-B
Plan ViewSCSC-96-B
7.00"18cmDeep
7.00"18cmDeep
1.62"4cm
36.00"91cm
6.00"15cm
13.00"33cm
1.62"4cm
0.093"2mm
Drain Valve20.00"51cm
On/o� Switch For Unit
Typical Elevation ViewAll SCSC-B Models
Typical End ViewAll SCSC-B Models
PowerSupply
Location
PROJECT
ITEM #
QUANTITY DATE
APPROVAL
The Delfield Company, 980 S. Isabella Rd., Mt. Pleasant, MI 48858, U.S.A. • (800) 733-8821 • Fax (800) 669-0619 • www.delfield.comDelfield reserves the right to make changes in design or specifications without prior notice. ©2002 The Delfield Company. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
Short Form SpecificationsExterior body is constructed of 18-gauge stainless steel side panels and 14-gauge galvanized bottom. All exterior side panels are reinforced with overlapping corners and are welded in place. All body cutouts are reinforced with 14-gauge galvanized channel supports. Exterior top is constructed of 14-gauge stainless steel, welded, ground and pol-ished into one integral unit. Top is fabri-cated with square exterior corners.Casters unit is mounted on 5” (12.7cm) diameter swivel casters with non-marking polyolefin tires and plate brakes. Overall height of caster assem-bly is 6” (15.2cm).
The following applies to SC Series onlySC units have a one or two door dry compartment(s) constructed of 18-gauge stainless steel. Each compartment is equipped with stainless steel shelf; door(s) are double-wall construction, with stain-less steel front panel.• SC-28, one compartment, 18” wide with one diir• SC-36, one compartment, 24” wide with one door• SC-50, one compartment, 36” wide with two doors• SC-60, one compartment, 48” wide with two doors• SC-74, one compartment, 48” wide with two doors• SC-96, two compartments, each 36” wide with two doors each
Model SC-36-NUshown with options A, F, G and P
Mobile All Purpose CountersSC & SC-NU
Optional Accessories and ModificationsA) 12” (30.5cm) wide stainless steel
fold-down tray slideC) 9” (22.9cm) wide three-bar fold-
down tray slideD) 10” (25.4cm) wide composite
fold-down cutting boardsE) 10” (25.4cm) wide stainless steel
fold-down work shelf F) Line-up interlock deviceG) Glass-front counter protectorH) Two tier display with glass
shelves and sneezeguardsHD) Dual service two tier display with
sneezeguardsI) Three tier display with glass
shelves and sneezeguardsJ) 12” (30.5cm) wide 18-gauge
stainless steel overshelfKS) Single service flip-up sneezeguardKD) Double service flip-up sneeze-
guardL) *Fluorescent or incandescent
light fixtures (specify which)M) *Radiant heat lampsMB) *Bullet-style heat lampsP) Open understorage with shelf
(SC-NU Series only)Q) *120V/60Hz/1ø, 10 amp conve-
nience outlet with breakerSG5A) Single dry insert with doors
(SC-NU Series only)SG5B) Double dry insert with doors
(SC-NU Series only)ST) Stainless steel trim stripsU) 14” x 30” (35.6cm x 76.2cm)
stainless steel end drop shelfV) 6” (15.2cm) high adjustable
stainless steel legs in lieu of casters *Inclusion of these options will alter the electrical specifications of unit.
The Delfield Company, 980 S. Isabella Rd., Mt. Pleasant, MI 48858, U.S.A. • (800) 733-8821 • Fax (800) 669-0619 • www.delfield.comDelfield reserves the right to make changes in design or specifications without prior notice. ©2002 The Delfield Company. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
SSSC 02/02
Mechanical Data–Standard Unit MODEL # 0F # OF SHIP NUMBER DOORS SHELVES WEIGHT
SC-28 1 1 165 lbs/75 kg
SC-36 1 1 185 lbs/84 kg
SC-50 2 1 205 lbs/93 kg
SC-60 2 1 240 lbs/109 kg
SC-74 2 1 270 lbs/123 kg
SC-96 4 2 310 lbs/141 kg
MODEL SHIP NUMBER WEIGHT
SC-28-NU 120 lbs/54 kg
SC-36-NU 160 lbs/73 kg
SC-50-NU 180 lbs/82 kg
SC-60-NU 210 lbs/95 kg
SC-74-NU 240 lbs/109 kg
SC-96-NU 280 lbs/127 kg
PLAN VIEWSC-28/
SC-28-NU
PLAN VIEWSC-36/
SC-36-NU
PLAN VIEWSC-74/
SC-74-NU
PLAN VIEWSC-96/
SC-96-NU
PLAN VIEWSC-50/
SC-50-NU
PLAN VIEWSC-60/
SC-60-NU
60"152.4cm
50"127cm
36"91.4cm
28"71.1cm
96"243.8cm
74"188cm
30"76.2cm
30"76.2cm
30"76.2cm
30"76.2cm
30"76.2cm
30"76.2cm
.093"
.23cm
DRY
.093"
.23cm
DRYDRY
.093"
.23cm
1.62"4.1cm
36"91.4cm
6"15.2cm
1.62"4.1cm
ELEVATION VIEWSC-28 AND
SC-36
ELEVATION VIEWSC-50 THROUGH SC-96(two compartments on
SC-96 - not shown)
ELEVATION VIEWALL SC-NU MODELS
END VIEWALL MODELS
SC & SC-NUMobile All Purpose Counters
Project __________________________________
Item ____________________________________
Quantity ________________________________
CSI Section 11400
Approved _______________________________
Date ____________________________________
980 S. Isabella Rd.Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858
Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com
Exterior body is constructed of 18-gauge stainless steel side panels and 14-gauge galvanized bottom. All exterior side panels are reinforced with overlapping corners and are welded in place. All body cutouts are reinforced with 14-gauge galvanized channel supports.
Interior Lining at the cashier’s end is 18-gauge stainless steel, with a stainless steel bottom shelf. Unit has an 16.50” x 16.50” x 5.00” (42cm x 42cm x 13cm) stainless steel cash drawer with lock and key.
Exterior top is constructed of 14-gauge stainless steel, welded, ground and polished into one integral unit. Top is fabricated with square exterior corners. A 2.00” (5cm) ferruled hole is located at the rear of the top to allow cord access for cash registers.
Casters; unit is mounted on 5.00” (13cm) diameter swivel casters with non-marking polyolefin tires and plate brakes. Overall height of caster assembly is 6.00” (15cm).
Specifications
Standard Features Options & Accessories• 18-gauge stainless steel exterior body
• 14-gauge galvanized bottom• 14-gauge stainless steel top• All exterior panels reinforced with
overlapping corners, welded in place• All body cutouts reinforced with 14-gauge
channel supports• All units are standard on 5” diameter
polyurethane swivel casters for easy cleaning
• Easy to use stainless steel interlock system is standard on base and tray slides
• A 3” grommet hole is located at the rear of the top to allow cord access for cash registers
• Stainless steel locking cash drawer standard• Stainless steel under shelf can serve as foot
rest or storage• One year parts and 90 day labor warranty
• SCS-30 30.00” (76cm) deep mobile cashier’s counter
• SCS-36 36.00” (91cm) deep mobile cashier’s counter
• SCS-50 50.00” (127cm) deep mobile cashier’s counter
Models
SCSMobile Cashier’s Counter
SCS: Mobile Cashier’s Counter
• Stainless steel fold-down tray slide• Three-bar fold-down tray slide• Composite fold-down cutting boards• Stainless steel fold-down work shelf• Line-up interlock device• 120V/60Hz/1ø, 10 amp convenience
outlet with breaker*• Stainless steel trim strips• Stainless steel end drop shelf• Adjustable height casters• 6” (15cm) high adjustable stainless steel
legs in lieu of casters• Laminate exterior panels in lieu of
stainless steel exterior panels
* Inclusion of these options will alter the electrical specifications of unit
SCS-30Shown with stainless steel fold-
down tray slide and convenience outlet with breaker
Shelleysteel TM
by Del�eld
980 S. Isabella Rd.Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858
Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981Fax: 800-669-0619www.delfield.com
Shelleysteel TM
by Del�eldSC
SM
obile
Cas
hie
r’s C
ount
er
Printed in the U.S.A.DSSCS05/13
Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice.
Specifications
Model Ship Weight
SCS-30 180 lbs / 82 kg
SCS-36 210 lbs / 95 kg
SCS-50 270 lbs / 122 kg
30.00"76cm
36.00"91cm
3.00"8cmGrommetedHole
1.75"4cm
S/S Shelf
1.62"4cm
36.00"91cm
6.00"15cm
.09"2mm
3.00"8cm
1.62"4cm
36.00"91cm
6.00"15cm
.09"2mm
3.00"8cm
30.00"76cm
30.00"76cm
3.00"8cmGrommetedHole
Plan ViewSCS-30
Elevation ViewAll Models
End ViewSCS-30
Plan ViewSCS-36
End ViewSCS-36
50.00"127cm
30.00"76cm3.00"
8cmGrommetedHole
Plan ViewSCS-50
End ViewSCS-50
1.62"4cm
36.00"91cm
6.00"15cm
.09"2mm
3.00"8cm
(1M) 7/13 Printed in U.S.A.
DH5000 High Temperature Hood-type Dishwashing Machine
Genesis
Gen
esis Ho
od
-type
stAndArd FeAtUres• EnERgy STAR® Qualified• nEW Exclusive Built-in booster configured
for both 40° and 70° Rise
• nEW Exclusive Field convertible from three to single phase or from straight to corner operation
• Rinse Sentry – ensures 180°F final rinse
• Auto start – starts unit when hood is closed
• Single point electrical connection
• High efficiency 1 HP pump
• Up to 53 racks per hour
• Self draining pump
• Automatic tank fill
• Detergent/chemical connections
• Interchangeable upper and lower spray arm
• Automatic drain valve – drains wash tank when power is off
• Vent fan control
• Bottom mounted digital controls
• PRV (Pressure Reducing Valve)
• Sloped hood keeps hot vapors away from operator
• Standard and Heavy Duty wash cycles
speCiFier stAtementSpecified unit will be Champion model Genesis, DH5000 high temperature hood-type dishwashing machine.Features sloped hood, electronic controls, Rinse Sentry, Auto start, interchangeable stainless steel wash and rinse arms, up to 53 racks/hr., .83 US gals/rack. 1 year parts and labor warranty.
Champion Industries, Inc. 3765 Champion Blvd., Winston-Salem, NC 27105
Tel: 336/661-1556 Fax: 336/661-1979 www.championindustries.com
ProjectItem No.Quantity
options & ACCessories : Drain Water Tempering Kit
: Direct Vent Option with fan
: Ventless/Heat Recovery/ Condensate Removal option
: Door interlock – locks door closed during the vent fan cycle (DV & VHR)
: Hot water coil with gas booster
: Racks
: Peg
: Flat
Direct Vent
Ventless Heat Recovery
Condensate Removal
DH5000 High Temperature Hood-type Dishwashing Machine
GenesisG
enes
is H
oo
d-t
ype
Due to an ongoing value analysis program at Champion, specifications contained in this catalog are subject to change without notice.Champion Industries, Inc., 3765 Champion Blvd., NC 27105 • 336/661-1556 • Fax: 336/661-1979 • www.championindustries.com
Shipping weight crated: 350 lbs. Dimensions shown in inches and [mm]
Warning: Plumbing, electrical connections should be made by qualified personnel who will observe all the applicable plumbing, sanitary and safety codes and the National Electrical Code.
‘USGBC’ and related logo is a trademark owned by the U.S. Green Building Council and is used by permission.
Electric 70° Rise Booster
VoltageRated Amps
Minimum Supply Ckt. Conductor Ampacity
Maximum Overcurrent Protective
Device208/60/1 79 100 100240/60/1 90 100 100208/60/3 48 60 60240/60/3 54 60 60480/60/3 22 25 25
speCiFiCAtionsCapacities Racks per hr. 37 Wash tank (gal.) 9.5
Motor horsepower 1 HPWater consumption Gal. per hr. (max. use) 30.7 Gal. per rack 0.83
Temperature °F Wash 150 Rinse 180
Heating Tank heat, electric 5.2 kW Electric Booster 10 kW
Time cycle in seconds Standard Extended
Wash 35 65 Rinse 10 10 Sanitary Dwell 15 15
Vent Fan 30 30 Total cycle 90 120
Utilities 1 Electrical
Machine Connection (See Electrical Box)
3 Drain 2" OD Connection 15 GPM max flow
4 Cold Water 3/4" NPT Cold Water 70°F40-45 PSI Flow pressure (machine operates at 20)
ventless/HeAt reCovery/CondensAte removAl optionRemoves heat and water vapor at the end of the cycle while recovering the normally exhausted heat and transferring it to the booster. No vent hood required.
For standard machine dimensions see DH5000 drawing
44
4
4
2
1
2
1
31
3
1
3 31
3
3
4
4
DH5000 DIRECT VENT
DH5000 CONDENSATE REMOVAL
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
5-3/4"[146]
13"[329]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
TYPICAL TABLE CONSTRUCTION
[762]30"
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
5-3/4"[146]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
69-3/4"[1770]
33-3/4"[857]
37-7/8"[963] 33-3/4"
[857]
34-1/8"[867]
37-7/8"[963]
18-1/8"[459]
17"[432]
17"[432]
17"[431]
Clearance
17"[431]
Clearance
1"[25]
78-3/8"[1990]
63"[1600]
69-3/4"[1770]
81-7/8"[2078]
11"[280]
11"[280]
9-1/4"[233]
44-1/8"[1119]
44-1/8"[1119]
4-3/8"[112]
4-3/4"[122]
8-7/8"[225]
8-7/8"[225]
6"[152]
6"[152]19-5/8"
[500]
26-1/8"[663]
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]31"
[787]
31"[787]
8-3/4"[221]
8-3/4"[221]8-3/4"
[221]
4-3/4"[122]
2-3/8"[60]
2-3/4"[70]
9-1/4"[233]
side view
plan view
Front view
44
4
4
2
1
2
1
31
3
1
3 31
3
3
4
4
DH5000 DIRECT VENT
DH5000 CONDENSATE REMOVAL
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
5-3/4"[146]
13"[329]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
TYPICAL TABLE CONSTRUCTION
[762]30"
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
5-3/4"[146]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
69-3/4"[1770]
33-3/4"[857]
37-7/8"[963] 33-3/4"
[857]
34-1/8"[867]
37-7/8"[963]
18-1/8"[459]
17"[432]
17"[432]
17"[431]
Clearance
17"[431]
Clearance
1"[25]
78-3/8"[1990]
63"[1600]
69-3/4"[1770]
81-7/8"[2078]
11"[280]
11"[280]
9-1/4"[233]
44-1/8"[1119]
44-1/8"[1119]
4-3/8"[112]
4-3/4"[122]
8-7/8"[225]
8-7/8"[225]
6"[152]
6"[152]19-5/8"
[500]
26-1/8"[663]
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]31"
[787]
31"[787]
8-3/4"[221]
8-3/4"[221]8-3/4"
[221]
4-3/4"[122]
2-3/8"[60]
2-3/4"[70]
9-1/4"[233]
Due to an ongoing value analysis program at Champion, specifications contained in this catalog are subject to change without notice.Champion Industries, Inc., 3765 Champion Blvd., NC 27105 • 336/661-1556 • Fax: 336/661-1979 • www.championindustries.com
‘USGBC’ and related logo is a trademark owned by the U.S. Green Building Council and is used by permission.
12
3 3
2
3
1
1
2
6"[152]
18-1/8"
[459]
33-3/4"[857]
37-7/8"[963]
17"[431]
60-1/8"[1526]
HOODUP
77-1/4"[1963]
CLEARANCE69-3/4"[1770]
1-7/8"[48]
5-1/8"[129]
MIN
MIN
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]
INSI
DE
TRAC
KS
HANDLE CLEARANCE CUTOUT FOR CORNER OPERATION
5"
3"
8-3/4"[221]
4-3/8"[112]
8-7/8"[225]
8"[203]
8"[203]
17"[432]
4-3/4"[121]
INSIDE TRACKS
2-5/8"[67]
20-1/8"[511]
20-1/8"[511]
31"[787]
29-1/2"[749]
34-1/8"[867]
30"[762]
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
DH5000 High TemperatureHood-type Dishwashing Machine
GenesisG
enes
is H
oo
d-t
ype
Shipping weight crated: 300 lbs. Dimensions shown in inches and [mm]
typical table Construction
speCiFiCAtionsCapacities Racks per hr. (NSF rated) 53 Wash tank (gal.) 9.5
Motor horsepower 1 HPWater consumption Gal. per hr. (max. use) 45.7 Gal. per rack 0.83
Temperature °F Wash 150 Rinse 180
Heating Tank heat, electric 5.2 kW Electric Booster 7.5-10 kW
Time cycle in seconds Standard Extended
Wash 35 65 Rinse 10 10 Sanitary Dwell 15 15 Total cycle 60 90
Warning: Plumbing, electrical connections should be made by qualified personnel who will observe all the applicable plumbing, sanitary and safety codes and the National Electrical Code.
Utilities 1 Electrical
Machine Connection (See Electrical Box)
2 Hot Water3/4" NPT Hot Water 110° - 140°F 20-22 PSI Flow Pressure
3 Drain 2" OD Connection 15 GPM Max Flow
4 Exhaust 250 CFM Hood Required
Electric Heat, 40°/70° Rise Booster
Voltage Rated AmpsMinimum Supply Circuit Ampacity
Maximum Overcurrent
Protective Device208-240/60/1 67-76 80 80208-240/60/3 41-47 50 50460-480/60/3 21-22 25 25
Electric Heat, no Booster
Voltage Rated AmpsMinimum Supply Circuit Ampacity
Maximum Overcurrent
Protective Device208-240/60/1 31-35 45 45208-240/60/3 20-22 30 30460-480/60/3 10 15 15
side view
Front view
Corner Configurationplan view
1
2
3 3
2
3
1
1
4
2
FRONT VIEWSIDE VIEW
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s
TYPICAL TABLE CONSTRUCTION
HANDLE CLEARANCE CUTOUT FOR CORNER OPERATION
5"
3"
CORNER CONFIGURATION
434
[121]
Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
STRAIGHT THROUGHTABLE CONFIGURATION
BETWEEN TABLE DIMENSION
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
30"[764]Table Typ 20-1/8"
[511]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
29-1/2"[749]
17"[431]
Clearance
60-1/8"[1526]
4-3/8"[112]
8-7/8"[225]
37-7/8"[963]
69-3/4"[1770]
77-1/4"[1963]
Hood Up
8"[203]
18-1/8"[459]
8-3/4"[221] 6"
[152]17"
[432]
31"[787]
34-1/8"[867]
33-3/4"[857]
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]
21-3/8"[543]
30"[762]
26-1/2"[673]
1-1/2"[38]
25-1/4"[641]
BetweenTables
5-1/8"[129]
7-5/8"[192]FromWall
[762]30"
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
1
2
3 3
2
3
1
1
4
2
FRONT VIEWSIDE VIEW
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s
TYPICAL TABLE CONSTRUCTION
HANDLE CLEARANCE CUTOUT FOR CORNER OPERATION
5"
3"
CORNER CONFIGURATION
434
[121]
Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
STRAIGHT THROUGHTABLE CONFIGURATION
BETWEEN TABLE DIMENSION
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
30"[764]Table Typ 20-1/8"
[511]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
29-1/2"[749]
17"[431]
Clearance
60-1/8"[1526]
4-3/8"[112]
8-7/8"[225]
37-7/8"[963]
69-3/4"[1770]
77-1/4"[1963]
Hood Up
8"[203]
18-1/8"[459]
8-3/4"[221] 6"
[152]17"
[432]
31"[787]
34-1/8"[867]
33-3/4"[857]
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]
21-3/8"[543]
30"[762]
26-1/2"[673]
1-1/2"[38]
25-1/4"[641]
BetweenTables
5-1/8"[129]
7-5/8"[192]FromWall
[762]30"
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
12
3 3
2
3
1
1
2
6"[152]
18-1/8"
[459]
33-3/4"[857]
37-7/8"[963]
17"[431]
60-1/8"[1526]
HOODUP
77-1/4"[1963]
CLEARANCE69-3/4"[1770]
1-7/8"[48]
5-1/8"[129]
MIN
MIN
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]
INSI
DE
TRAC
KS
HANDLE CLEARANCE CUTOUT FOR CORNER OPERATION
5"
3"
8-3/4"[221]
4-3/8"[112]
8-7/8"[225]
8"[203]
8"[203]
17"[432]
4-3/4"[121]
INSIDE TRACKS
2-5/8"[67]
20-1/8"[511]
20-1/8"[511]
31"[787]
29-1/2"[749]
34-1/8"[867]
30"[762]
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
Due to an ongoing value analysis program at Champion, specifications contained in this catalog are subject to change without notice.Champion Industries, Inc., 3765 Champion Blvd., NC 27105 • 336/661-1556 • Fax: 336/661-1979 • www.championindustries.com
‘USGBC’ and related logo is a trademark owned by the U.S. Green Building Council and is used by permission.
44
4
4
2
1
2
1
31
3
1
3 31
3
3
4
4
DH5000 DIRECT VENT
DH5000 CONDENSATE REMOVAL
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
5-3/4"[146]
13"[329]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
TYPICAL TABLE CONSTRUCTION
[762]30"
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
5-3/4"[146]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
69-3/4"[1770]
33-3/4"[857]
37-7/8"[963] 33-3/4"
[857]
34-1/8"[867]
37-7/8"[963]
18-1/8"[459]
17"[432]
17"[432]
17"[431]
Clearance
17"[431]
Clearance
1"[25]
78-3/8"[1990]
63"[1600]
69-3/4"[1770]
81-7/8"[2078]
11"[280]
11"[280]
9-1/4"[233]
44-1/8"[1119]
44-1/8"[1119]
4-3/8"[112]
4-3/4"[122]
8-7/8"[225]
8-7/8"[225]
6"[152]
6"[152]19-5/8"
[500]
26-1/8"[663]
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]31"
[787]
31"[787]
8-3/4"[221]
8-3/4"[221]8-3/4"
[221]
4-3/4"[122]
2-3/8"[60]
2-3/4"[70]
9-1/4"[233]
plan view
DH5000 High TemperatureHood-type Dishwashing Machine
GenesisG
enesis H
oo
d-ty
pe
Shipping weight crated: 350 lbs. Dimensions shown in inches and [mm]
speCiFiCAtionsCapacities Racks per hr. 48 Wash tank (gal.) 9.5
Motor horsepower 1 HPWater consumption Gal. per hr. (max. use) 39.8 Gal. per rack 0.83
Temperature °F Wash 150 Rinse 180
Heating Tank heat, electric 5.2 kW Electric Booster 7.5-10 kW
Time cycle in seconds Standard Extended
Wash 35 65 Rinse 10 10 Sanitary Dwell 15 15
Vent Fan 10 10 Total cycle 70 100
Warning: Plumbing, electrical connections should be made by qualified personnel who will observe all the applicable plumbing, sanitary and safety codes and the National Electrical Code.
Utilities 1 Electrical
Machine Connection (See Electrical Box)
2 Hot Water3/4" NPT Hot Water 110° - 140°F 20-22 PSI Flow pressure
3 Drain 2" OD Connection 15 GPM max flow
4 Exhaust 250 CFM Fan 4" Round Duct
Electric 40°/70° Rise Booster
VoltageRated Amps
Min. Supply Ckt. Conductor Ampacity
Max. Overcurrent Protective
Device208-240/60/1 67-76 80 80208-240/60/3 41-47 50 50460-480/60/3 21-22 25 25
direCt vent optionAllows unit to vent directly to the outside.No vent hood required.
For standard machine dimensions see DH5000 drawing
Front viewside view
44
4
4
2
1
2
1
31
3
1
3 31
3
3
4
4
DH5000 DIRECT VENT
DH5000 CONDENSATE REMOVAL
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEWFRONT VIEW
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
PLAN VIEW
Insi
de T
rack
s Rear Track
Front Track Corn
er T
rack
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
5-3/4"[146]
13"[329]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
TYPICAL TABLE CONSTRUCTION
[762]30"
1-1/2" [32] Roll
1-1/8"[29]
7-1/4" [184]
21-3/8"[543]
8-3/8"[214]
From Wall
20-1/8"[511]
30"[764]TableTyp
5-3/4"[146]
5-1/8"[129]
20-1/8"[511]
Inside Tracks
7-5/8"[192]
From Wall
69-3/4"[1770]
33-3/4"[857]
37-7/8"[963] 33-3/4"
[857]
34-1/8"[867]
37-7/8"[963]
18-1/8"[459]
17"[432]
17"[432]
17"[431]
Clearance
17"[431]
Clearance
1"[25]
78-3/8"[1990]
63"[1600]
69-3/4"[1770]
81-7/8"[2078]
11"[280]
11"[280]
9-1/4"[233]
44-1/8"[1119]
44-1/8"[1119]
4-3/8"[112]
4-3/4"[122]
8-7/8"[225]
8-7/8"[225]
6"[152]
6"[152]19-5/8"
[500]
26-1/8"[663]
19-5/8"[500]
26-1/8"[663]31"
[787]
31"[787]
8-3/4"[221]
8-3/4"[221]8-3/4"
[221]
4-3/4"[122]
2-3/8"[60]
2-3/4"[70]
9-1/4"[233]
(1M) 1/13 Printed in U.S.A.
DL2000
DL2000 m
ach
ine
StanDarD FeatureS• Convertiblecornertostraightandstraighttocorner• 40 racks / 160 covers per hour
• Economical to operate
• Uses only .93 gallons of water per cycle
• All stainless steel construction assures longlife and years of trouble free operation
• Unique spray arm system features upper and lower stainless steel wash arms with reinforced end caps
• Top mounted controls include built-in chemical pumps and deliming system for dealing with scale
• Auto start/stop makes operation safe and easy
• New integrated scrap tray prevents food soil from entering drain system
• Airgap fill system
• 17" tall door opening
SpeciFier StatementSpecified unit will be Champion DL2000 3 Door Lift low temperature, chemical sanitizing commercial dishwashers meet ETL, UL, and CUL sanitation and construction standards WITHOUT the use of BOOSTER or TANKHEATERS. The model is constructed entirely of stainless steel. Each unit automatically washes, rinses and sanitizes utensils in standard 19-3/4" x 19-3/4" racks. Units come with standard upper and lower stainless steel wash arms.
Champion Industries, Inc. 3765 Champion Blvd., Winston-Salem, NC 27105
Tel: 336/661-1556 Fax: 336/661-1979
www.championindustries.com
ProjectItem No.Quantity
OptiOnS & acceSSOrieS : Sanitizer Alarm
DL2000 Low Temp Dishwashing Machine
PANTONE 300c
PANTONE 302c
C 100M 45Y 0K 3
C 100M 25Y 0K 50
R 23G 110B 183
R 0G 66B 99
ALI PANTONE
ALI CMYK
ALI RGB
# 006EBE
# 004263
DL2000 Low Temp Dishwashing Machine
DL2000D
L200
0 m
ach
ine
Shipping weight crated: 218 lbs. Dimensions shown in inches
Warning:Plumbing, electrical connections should be made by qualified personnel who will observe all the applicable plumbing, sanitary and safety codes and the National Electrical Code.
SpeciFicatiOnSCapacities Racks per hr. (NSF rated) 40
Pump Capacity 52 Gal/197 LPMMotorhorsepower 1 HPWaterconsumption Gal. per hr. (max. use) 37 [liters/imp gal.] [139/30.8] Gal. per rack 0.93 [liters/imp gal.] [3.53/0.77]Temperature°F/°C Required 120/49 Recommended 140/60
Timecycleinseconds Wash 45 Rinse 30 Dwell 15 Total cycle 90
utilitiesWater1/2" water inlet
Electrical115V; 16 amps
Drain2" I.P.S.
table construction
right ViewFront Viewtop View – Straight
Due to an ongoing value analysis program at Champion, specifications contained in this catalog are subject to change without notice.ChampionIndustries,Inc.,3765ChampionBlvd.,NC27105•336/661-1556•Fax:336/661-1979•www.championindustries.com
‘USGBC’ and related logo is a trademark owned by the U.S. Green Building Council and is used by permission.
17" Standard
25-3/4"
9-1/2"
4-1/2"
10"
5" Min Water Inlet3" off the top
ElectricalHook-Up3" off the top
11" Adj 12"Scrap Trap Drain Facing Floor
25-3/4"
Door Opening 20-3/4"
34"Adj35"
75"
56"Adj57"
25-3/4"
9-1/2" 10"
Water Inlet3" off the Top
Electrical Hook-Up3" off the Top
5" Min
25-3/4"
4-1/2"
17" Standard
25-3/4"
9-1/2"
4-1/2"
10"
5" Min Water Inlet3" off the top
ElectricalHook-Up3" off the top
11" Adj 12"Scrap Trap Drain Facing Floor
25-3/4"
Door Opening 20-3/4"
34"Adj35"
75"
56"Adj57"
25-3/4"
9-1/2" 10"
Water Inlet3" off the Top
Electrical Hook-Up3" off the Top
5" Min
25-3/4"
4-1/2"
17" Standard
25-3/4"
9-1/2"
4-1/2"
10"
5" Min Water Inlet3" off the top
ElectricalHook-Up3" off the top
11" Adj 12"Scrap Trap Drain Facing Floor
25-3/4"
Door Opening 20-3/4"
34"Adj35"
75"
56"Adj57"
25-3/4"
9-1/2" 10"
Water Inlet3" off the Top
Electrical Hook-Up3" off the Top
5" Min
25-3/4"
4-1/2"
top View – corner
2-3/4"
1-1/4" Max. 3/16"Min.
20-1/2" 25-3/8"
6"
Min.
“940” Seriesshown
STAINLESS STEEL
REGALINE SINKSThree Compartments - Two Drainboards
C-5
FEATURES:Tile edge for ease of installation.One piece Deep Drawn sink bowls with integral drainboards with splash.Featuring the single bowl unit design.All sink bowls have a large liberal 3” radius.Placement of the welded leg assembly ensures stability and furnishes direct support of the column load requirement for the entire sink unit. “940” series is supplied with adjustable front and rear cross brace featuring leg casting to secure left to right cross bracing.
CONSTRUCTION:All TIG welded. Welded areas blended to match adjacent surfaces and to a satin finish.Gussets welded to a die-embossed reinforcing channel.
YES! It's SeaM ess!
14 Ga. 304 S/S 16 Ga. 304 S/S 18 Ga. 304 S/S 14” Water Level 12” Water Level 12” Water Level
Approx. Wt. Approx. Wt. Approx. Wt. Cubic MODEL # (lbs.) MODEL # (lbs.) MODEL # (lbs.) Feet
94-3-54-18RL 94-3-54-24RL 94-3-54-36RL
94-23-60-18RL 94-23-60-24RL 94-23-60-36RL
94-63-54-18RL 94-63-54-24RL 94-63-54-36RL
94-43-72-24RL 94-43-72-36RL
94-83-60-18RL 94-83-60-24RL 94-83-60-36RL
93-3-54-18RL 93-3-54-24RL 93-3-54-36RL
93-23-60-18RL 93-23-60-24RL 93-23-60-36RL
93-63-54-18RL 93-63-54-24RL 93-63-54-36RL
93-43-72-24RL 93-43-72-36RL
93-83-60-18RL 93-83-60-24RL 93-83-60-36RL
9-3-54-18RL 9-3-54-24RL 9-3-54-36RL
9-23-60-18RL 9-23-60-24RL 9-23-60-36RL
9-63-54-18RL 9-63-54-24RL 9-63-54-36RL
9-43-72-24RL 9-43-72-36RL
9-83-60-18RL 9-83-60-24RL 9-83-60-36RL
BOWL SIZE O.A. LENGTH DRBD. SIZE
(inches) (mm) (inches) (mm)
91”
103”
127”
103”
115”
139”
97”
109”
133”
†127” †151”
103”
115”
139”
182
190
208
198
195
364
226
233
325
318
345
277
305
350
2311
2616
3226
2616
2921
3531
2457
2762
3372
3226
3835
2616
2921
3531
49
55
96
59
65
89
62
85
96
98
110
83
95
109
18”
24”
*36”
18”
24”
*36”
18”
24”
*36”
24”
*36”
18”
24”
*36”
457
610
914
457
610
914
457
610
914
610
914
457
610
914
16 x 20 (406 x 508)
20 x 20 (508 x 508)
18 x 24 (457 x 610)
24 x 24 (610 x 610)
20 x 28 (508 x 711)
230
248
275
248
276
408
323
334
418
390
448
358
394
451
189
197
239
203
220
387
289
304
367
331
393
315
346
398
14” Water Level 12” Water Level 12” Water Level 17” Flood Level 15” Flood Level 15” Flood Level
SPEC-LINE 940 Series STANDARD 930 Series SUPER SAVER 900 Series
* Regalines with 36” Drainboards are Supplied with Two Sets of Legs for Support.
† Requires Two Faucets
LEGS: • 1 5/8” diameter tubular stainless steel. • Stainless steel gussets & channels. • Stainless Steel 1” adjustable bullet feet.
MATERIALS: Spec-Line (940 Series): 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel
11” High Splash.Standard (930 Series): 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel 8” High Splash.Super Saver (900 Series): 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel 8” High Splash.
Recessed Bowl Surface Accommodates
Poly-Vance Cutting Boards & Sink Covers
Item #: Qty #:
Model #:
Project #:
www.advancetabco.com
Customer Service Available To Assist You 1-800-645-3166 8:30 am - 8:00 pm E.S.T.
For Orders & Customer Service: Email: [email protected] or Fax: 631-242-6900
For Smart Fabrication™ Quotes:Email: [email protected] or Fax: 631-586-2933
200 Heartland Boulevard, Edgewood, NY 11717-8380
ADVANCE TABCO is constantly engaged in a program of improving our products. Therefore, we reserve the right to change specifications without prior notice.
© ADVANCE TABCO, SEPTEMBER 2014C-5a
DIMENSIONS and SPECIFICATIONS
TOL Overall: ± .500” ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL Interior: ± .250”
SECTIONPLUMBING ROUGH-IN
MECHANICAL:• Supply is 1/2” IPS hot & cold.
• Faucet holes on 8” centers.
• Faucets are not included (see accessories).
• Waste drains are 1 1/2” IPS S/S basket type, located in center of sink bowl, and are included.
A B C D V W X Y Z V W X Y Z BOWL Overall DRBD Recommended (SIZE) Length (SIZE) Use
DESCRIPTION
91” 103” 127”
103”115” 139”
97”109” 133”
†127”†151”
103”115” 139”
20”
20”
24”
24”
28”
16”
20”
18”
24”
20”
27”
27”
31”
31”
35”
38”
38”
38”
38”
38”
11”
11”
11”
11”
11”
14”
14”
14”
14”
14”
20”
20”
20”
20”
20”
45”
45”
45”
45”
45”
38”
38”
38”
38”
38”
8”
8”
8”
8”
8”
12”
12”
12”
12”
12”
22”
22”
22”
22”
22”
42”
42”
42”
42”
42”
13 5/8”
13 5/8”
15 5/8”
15 5/8”
17 5/8”
18” 24”
*36”
18” 24”
*36”
18” 24”
*36”
24” *36”
18” 24”
*36”
16x20
20x20
24x24
18x24
20x28
DISHSINKS
DISH &POT SINKS
POT & PAN SINKS
POT SINKS
PAN SINKS
940 SERIES 900 & 930 SERIES
† Requires Two Faucets
DrainboardSize
OverallLength
A D
B
DrainboardSize
OverallLength
A D
B
* Regalines with 36” Drainboards are Supplied with Two Sets of Legs for Support.
SPEC-LINE 940 Series STANDARD 930 Series SUPER SAVER 900 Series
Adjustable
Welded
Adjustable
Welded
940 Series Adjustable Cross Bracing
8"203mm
2 3/8"[60mm]
6 3/4"[172mm]
18"457mm
Product Specifications:
Scale:
Model No.
Item No.
T&S BRASS AND BRONZE WORKS, INC.
03/13/14JRM
B-0230
8" Wall Mount Mixing Faucet, Eterna Cartridges, Lever Handles, 18" Swivel Nozzle & 1/2" NPT Female Inlets
2 Saddleback Cove / P.O. Box 1088Travelers Rest, SC 29690
Date: 1:6
This Space for Architect/Engineer Approval
Job Name__________________________Date_________
Model Specified_____________________ Quantity______
Customer/Wholesaler______________________________
Contractor_______________________________________
Architect/Engineer_________________________________
Checked:Drawn: Approved:DHL JHB
Travelers Rest, SC: 800-476-4103 • Simi Valley, CA: 800-423-0150 • Fax: 864-834-3518 • www.tsbrass.com
Sheet: 1 of 2
Product Compliance:
ASME A112.18.1 / CSA B125.1NSF 61 - Section 9NSF 372 (Low Lead Content)ANSI A117.1 (ADA)
Adjustable from7 3/4" to 8 1/4"
[197mm to 210mm]
Eterna Cartridges &Lever Handles w/ Color Coded Indexes
3 5/8"93mm
Ø 2" [51mm] Flanges w/1/2" NPTFemale Inlets
MountingSurface
065X18" Swing Nozzle w/ Stream RegulatorOutlet
9 9/16"242mm
12 7/16"315mm
ITEM NO. SALES NO. DESCRIPTION
1 065X 18" Swing Nozzle
2 B-PT Stream Regulator Outlet
3 001048-45 Nozzle Tip Washer
4 000922-45 Lever Handle Screw
5 001661-45 Red Index-HW
6 001638-45 Lever Handle7 005960-40 Eterna Cartridge, RTC
8 009538-45 Swivel Washer
9 011429-45 Swivel Sleeves (2)10 001074-45 O-Ring
11 001660-45 Blue Index-CW12 005959-40 Eterna Cartridge, LTC
13 001019-45 Coupling Nut Washer
14 00AA 1/2" NPT Female Eccentric Flange
15 002713-40 Eterna Cartridge, LTC w/ Handle, Index & Screw
16 002714-40 Eterna Cartridge, RTC w/ Handle, Index & Screw
Product Compliance:
ASME A112.18.1 / CSA B125.1NSF 61 - Section 9NSF 372 (Low Lead Content)ANSI A117.1 (ADA)
2of2Sheet:JHBDHL Approved:Drawn: Checked: Date:
8" Wall Mount Mixing Faucet, Eterna Cartridges, Lever Handles, 18" Swivel Nozzle & 1/2" NPT Female Inlets
JRM 03/13/14 Scale:
Product Specifications:
Model No.
Item No.
T&S BRASS AND BRONZE WORKS, INC.
Travelers Rest, SC: 800-476-4103 • Simi Valley, CA: 800-423-0150 • Fax: 864-834-3518 • www.tsbrass.com
B-0230
2 Saddleback Cove / P.O. Box 1088Travelers Rest, SC 29690
NTS
1
15
16
9
10
11
3
4 8
7
5
6
13 14
2
12
Item #: Qty #:
Model #:
Project #:
HB-SS-243HB-SS-244HB-SS-245HB-SS-246HB-SS-247HB-SS-248HB-SS-249HB-SS-2410HB-SS-2412
# ofLength FLAT TOP 1 1/2” SPLASH 5” SPLASH Doors Wt.
# ofLength FLAT TOP 1 1/2” SPLASH 5” SPLASH Doors Wt.
# ofLength FLAT TOP 1 1/2” SPLASH 5” SPLASH Doors Wt.
24” WIDE
36”48”60”72”84”96”108”120”144”
222444446
222444446
HF-SS-243HF-SS-244HF-SS-245HF-SS-246HF-SS-247HF-SS-248HF-SS-249HF-SS-2410HF-SS-2412
HK-SS-243HK-SS-244HK-SS-245HK-SS-246HK-SS-247HK-SS-248HK-SS-249HK-SS-2410HK-SS-2412
260 lbs.
295 lbs.
335 lbs.
375 lbs.
415 lbs.
460 lbs.
505 lbs.
550 lbs.
635 lbs.
30” WIDE
HB-SS-303HB-SS-304HB-SS-305HB-SS-306HB-SS-307HB-SS-308HB-SS-309HB-SS-3010HB-SS-3012
HF-SS-303HF-SS-304HF-SS-305HF-SS-306HF-SS-307HF-SS-308HF-SS-309HF-SS-3010HF-SS-3012
HK-SS-303HK-SS-304HK-SS-305HK-SS-306HK-SS-307HK-SS-308HK-SS-309HK-SS-3010HK-SS-3012
290 lbs.
330 lbs.
370 lbs.
415 lbs.
455 lbs.
500 lbs.
555 lbs.
615 lbs.
685 lbs.
36” WIDE
36”48”60”72”84”96”108”120”144”
HB-SS-363HB-SS-364HB-SS-365HB-SS-366HB-SS-367HB-SS-368HB-SS-369HB-SS-3610HB-SS-3612
HF-SS-363HF-SS-364HF-SS-365HF-SS-366HF-SS-367HF-SS-368HF-SS-369HF-SS-3610HF-SS-3612
HK-SS-363HK-SS-364HK-SS-365HK-SS-366HK-SS-367HK-SS-368HK-SS-369HK-SS-3610HK-SS-3612
230 lbs.
270 lbs.
310 lbs.
355 lbs.
395 lbs.
445 lbs.
495 lbs.
535 lbs.
615 lbs.
STAINLESS STEEL
HINGED DOOR STYLEENCLOSED BASE WORK TABLES
N-1
FEATURES:FLAT TOP is furnished with a 1 5/8” sanitary rolled rim on the frontand 1 5/8” square bend edges on the 2 sides and rear.1 1/2” SPLASH is furnished with a 1 5/8” sanitary rolled rim on thefront side and 1 5/8” square bend edges on the 2 sides and a 1 1/2”splash of single metal thickness on the rear side.5” SPLASH is furnished with a 1 5/8” sanitary rolled rim on the frontside and 1 5/8” square bend edges on the 2 sides and a 5” splashwith a 1” return on the rear side.HINGED DOORS are constructed as double panel doors withrecessed inner panels for extra rigidity.Rear flush panel along the rear of the base unit.
CONSTRUCTION:All TIG welded. Exposed areas finished to match adjacent surfaces.Entire Top is mechanically polished to a satin finish and is sounddeadened.Hat section secured to Top reinforces and maintains level workingsurface.UNI-BODY DESIGN sides, back and fixed mid shelf (sold separately)are welded to form a single rigid structure.Legs bolt on to table base.
MATERIAL:TOP is 14 gauge stainless steel type “304” series with galvanized understructure.
BODY is 18 gauge stainless steel type “430” series.
LEGS are stainless steel and include 1 1/2” adjustable hex foot.
NEW YORK GEORGIA TEXAS NEVADAFax: (631) 242-6900 Fax: (770) 775-5625 Fax: (972) 932-4795 Fax: (775) 972-1578www.advancetabco.com
Customer Service Available To Assist You 1-800-645-3166 8:30 am - 8:00 pm E.S.T.Email Orders To: [email protected]. For Smart Fabrication™ Quotes, Email To: [email protected] or Fax To: 631-586-2933
Flat Top 1 1/2” Backsplash
5” Backsplash
Mid Shelves Are Available. To Add a Fixed Mid Shelf, Add “M” After each Model Number.Upgrade to Adjustable Mid Shelf. Add TA-116.
36”48”60”72”84”96”108”120”144”
222444446
FEATURING BOLT-ON STAINLESS STEEL LEG
TOL ± .500” Units 7’ and larger are furnished with 6 legs. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL
DETAILS and SPECIFICATIONS
N-1a
HB-Series Flat Top
HF-Series 1 1/2” Rear Splash
HK-Series 5” Rear Splash
____ TA-20L ....... Replacement Bolt-on Leg____ TA-19L ....... Replacement Bolt-on Leg With Flanged Bullet Foot____ TA-255P..... 5” Heavy Duty Polyurethane Casters
(set of 4 - 2 w/ Brakes)____ TA-255AP .. 5” Heavy Duty Polyurethane Casters
(set of 6 - 2 w/ Brakes)____ TA-46 ........ Door Locks____ TA-54 ........ Removable Kick Plate
OPTIONAL MID SHELF DETAILS OPTIONAL ENCLOSED BASE ACCESSORIES
200 Heartland Boulevard, Edgewood, NY 11717-8380
ADVANCE TABCO is constantly engaged in a program ofimproving our products. Therefore, we reserve the right tochange specifications without prior notice.
© ADVANCE TABCO, MAY 2014
12 1/2"
12 1/2"
1 1/2"
35 1/2"
1"
7"
1"
NEW!
TA-116 ADJUSTABLE ENCLOSED BASE CABINET MID SHELF (Sold Separately)
Shelves Over 36" In Length Require Multiple Sections With Center Partition.
Item #: Qty #:
Model #:
Project #:
HB-SS-243HB-SS-244HB-SS-245HB-SS-246HB-SS-247HB-SS-248HB-SS-249HB-SS-2410HB-SS-2412
# ofLength FLAT TOP 1 1/2” SPLASH 5” SPLASH Doors Wt.
# ofLength FLAT TOP 1 1/2” SPLASH 5” SPLASH Doors Wt.
# ofLength FLAT TOP 1 1/2” SPLASH 5” SPLASH Doors Wt.
24” WIDE
36”48”60”72”84”96”108”120”144”
222444446
222444446
HF-SS-243HF-SS-244HF-SS-245HF-SS-246HF-SS-247HF-SS-248HF-SS-249HF-SS-2410HF-SS-2412
HK-SS-243HK-SS-244HK-SS-245HK-SS-246HK-SS-247HK-SS-248HK-SS-249HK-SS-2410HK-SS-2412
260 lbs.
295 lbs.
335 lbs.
375 lbs.
415 lbs.
460 lbs.
505 lbs.
550 lbs.
635 lbs.
30” WIDE
HB-SS-303HB-SS-304HB-SS-305HB-SS-306HB-SS-307HB-SS-308HB-SS-309HB-SS-3010HB-SS-3012
HF-SS-303HF-SS-304HF-SS-305HF-SS-306HF-SS-307HF-SS-308HF-SS-309HF-SS-3010HF-SS-3012
HK-SS-303HK-SS-304HK-SS-305HK-SS-306HK-SS-307HK-SS-308HK-SS-309HK-SS-3010HK-SS-3012
290 lbs.
330 lbs.
370 lbs.
415 lbs.
455 lbs.
500 lbs.
555 lbs.
615 lbs.
685 lbs.
36” WIDE
36”48”60”72”84”96”108”120”144”
HB-SS-363HB-SS-364HB-SS-365HB-SS-366HB-SS-367HB-SS-368HB-SS-369HB-SS-3610HB-SS-3612
HF-SS-363HF-SS-364HF-SS-365HF-SS-366HF-SS-367HF-SS-368HF-SS-369HF-SS-3610HF-SS-3612
HK-SS-363HK-SS-364HK-SS-365HK-SS-366HK-SS-367HK-SS-368HK-SS-369HK-SS-3610HK-SS-3612
230 lbs.
270 lbs.
310 lbs.
355 lbs.
395 lbs.
445 lbs.
495 lbs.
535 lbs.
615 lbs.
STAINLESS STEEL
HINGED DOOR STYLEENCLOSED BASE WORK TABLES
N-1
FEATURES:FLAT TOP is furnished with a 1 5/8” sanitary rolled rim on the frontand 1 5/8” square bend edges on the 2 sides and rear.1 1/2” SPLASH is furnished with a 1 5/8” sanitary rolled rim on thefront side and 1 5/8” square bend edges on the 2 sides and a 1 1/2”splash of single metal thickness on the rear side.5” SPLASH is furnished with a 1 5/8” sanitary rolled rim on the frontside and 1 5/8” square bend edges on the 2 sides and a 5” splashwith a 1” return on the rear side.HINGED DOORS are constructed as double panel doors withrecessed inner panels for extra rigidity.Rear flush panel along the rear of the base unit.
CONSTRUCTION:All TIG welded. Exposed areas finished to match adjacent surfaces.Entire Top is mechanically polished to a satin finish and is sounddeadened.Hat section secured to Top reinforces and maintains level workingsurface.UNI-BODY DESIGN sides, back and fixed mid shelf (sold separately)are welded to form a single rigid structure.Legs bolt on to table base.
MATERIAL:TOP is 14 gauge stainless steel type “304” series with galvanized understructure.
BODY is 18 gauge stainless steel type “430” series.
LEGS are stainless steel and include 1 1/2” adjustable hex foot.
NEW YORK GEORGIA TEXAS NEVADAFax: (631) 242-6900 Fax: (770) 775-5625 Fax: (972) 932-4795 Fax: (775) 972-1578www.advancetabco.com
Customer Service Available To Assist You 1-800-645-3166 8:30 am - 8:00 pm E.S.T.Email Orders To: [email protected]. For Smart Fabrication™ Quotes, Email To: [email protected] or Fax To: 631-586-2933
Flat Top 1 1/2” Backsplash
5” Backsplash
Mid Shelves Are Available. To Add a Fixed Mid Shelf, Add “M” After each Model Number.Upgrade to Adjustable Mid Shelf. Add TA-116.
36”48”60”72”84”96”108”120”144”
222444446
FEATURING BOLT-ON STAINLESS STEEL LEG
TOL ± .500” Units 7’ and larger are furnished with 6 legs. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL
DETAILS and SPECIFICATIONS
N-1a
HB-Series Flat Top
HF-Series 1 1/2” Rear Splash
HK-Series 5” Rear Splash
____ TA-20L ....... Replacement Bolt-on Leg____ TA-19L ....... Replacement Bolt-on Leg With Flanged Bullet Foot____ TA-255P..... 5” Heavy Duty Polyurethane Casters
(set of 4 - 2 w/ Brakes)____ TA-255AP .. 5” Heavy Duty Polyurethane Casters
(set of 6 - 2 w/ Brakes)____ TA-46 ........ Door Locks____ TA-54 ........ Removable Kick Plate
OPTIONAL MID SHELF DETAILS OPTIONAL ENCLOSED BASE ACCESSORIES
200 Heartland Boulevard, Edgewood, NY 11717-8380
ADVANCE TABCO is constantly engaged in a program ofimproving our products. Therefore, we reserve the right tochange specifications without prior notice.
© ADVANCE TABCO, MAY 2014
12 1/2"
12 1/2"
1 1/2"
35 1/2"
1"
7"
1"
NEW!
TA-116 ADJUSTABLE ENCLOSED BASE CABINET MID SHELF (Sold Separately)
Shelves Over 36" In Length Require Multiple Sections With Center Partition.
INSULATEDHOT CABINET
MODEL H-135-SUA-11
Page B-9.1Jan., 2014
JOB:
ITEM NO:
5925 Heisley Road • Mentor, OH 44060-1833Phone: 877/CRESCOR • Fax: 440/350-7267www.crescor.com
H-135-SUA-11
ACCESSORIES and OPTIONS(Available at extra cost):q Full View Window Door
q Red Powder Coat Doors
q Extra Universal Angles
q Corner Bumpers
q Perimeter Bumper
q Push Handle
q 208 or 240 Volt Service
q Food Safe Digital Thermometer
See page B-20 for accessory details.
FEATURES AND BENEFITS:• Fully insulated holding cabinet keeps prepared
foods at serving temperatures.
• Powerful, yet efficient, 1500 Watt heating system maintains the right temperature to properly hold products. Heats up to 200˚F (93˚C).
• Internal frame in body maintains structural rigidity.
• Body constructed of non-corrosive, stainless steel for strength and ease of cleaning. Extended base protects cabinet body.
• Insulated Dutch doors prevent temperature loss; door gaskets for proper seal. Field reversible for flexibility.
• Standard with right hand hinging; left hand hinging available upon request.
• Recessed push/pull handles on both sides prevent damage to walls; allows easy maneuvering.
• Safety-conscious anti-microbial latches reduce the spread of germs.
• Eleven sets of wire universal angles accommodate a large variety of pan sizes on adjustable 1-1/2" centers.
• Slanted control panel has easy-to-read thermometer; digital thermometer available upon request. Entire assembly removable for cleaning and maintenance.
• Heavy duty 5" swivel casters, two with brakes. Provides mobility when fully loaded.
®
SANITATIONNSF/ANSI 4
C US
®
H-135-SUA-11
5925 Heisley Road • Mentor, OH 44060-1833Phone: 877/CRESCOR • Fax: 440/350-7267www.crescor.com© Crescent Metal Products, Inc. 2014 All rights reserved. Litho in U.S.A.
In line with its policy to continually improve its products, CRES COR reserves the right to change materials and specifications without notice.
SHORT FORM SPECIFICATIONSCres Cor Insulated Holding Cabinet Model H-135-SUA-11. Inner, outer and top liners of 22 ga. stainless steel. (11) sets wire angles for multiple pan sizes, adjust able spacing every 1-1/2". Field reversible Dutch doors, 20 ga. stainless steel. Insulated with 1-1/2” fiberglass in top and back, 1" in sidewalls and doors. Removable 1500 Watt, 125 Volt power unit. Full base, .125 aluminum. 5" swivel modulus casters, Delrin bearings. Load capacity 250 lbs. each. 2-Year Parts / 1-Year Labor warranty. Provide the following accessories: ____ _____ _____ CSA-US, CSA-C, CSA to NSF4 listed.
CRES COR MODEL NO.
PAN DIM "A" DIM "B" DIM "C" INSIDE DIMENSIONS WEIGHTACT.CAP/ANGLES SIZE WIDTH DEPTH HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH HEIGHT
H-135-SUA-11 11SETS
SEE NOTEBELOW
IN 25-3/4 33-1/2 69-3/4 21-3/4 27 54 LBS 225MM 655 850 1775 555 690 1375 KG 102
NOTES: 1. Pan sizes 22" x 20" (560 x 510) Roast & Bake Pans, 10" x 20" (255 x 510) Roast & Bake Pans, 18" x 26" (460 x 660) Bun Pans, 14" x 18" (355 x 460) Service Trays, 12" x 20" (305 x 510) Steam Table Pans.Refer to Pan Size Chart at end of section.
2. When ordering bumpers, add 2" to overall dimensions.
CABINET:• Body: 22 ga. stainless steel.• Reinforcement: Internal framework of .100 aluminum.• Insulation: Fiberglass, thermal conductivity (K factor) is .23 at 75˚F, 1" insulation in sidewalls and doors, 1-1/2" in top and back.
• Air tunnel: 22 ga. stainless steel; lift-out type, mounted on back panel.• Push/pull handles (2): Black plastic; 5-1/2” vertical; recessed.
BASE:• Full base construction, .125 aluminum.• Casters: 5" dia., swivel, modulus tires, 1-1/4 wide, load cap. 250 lbs. each, temp. range -40˚/+180˚F. Delrin bearings. Front casters equipped with brakes.
DUTCH DOORS:• Field reversible.• Formed 20 ga. stainless steel.• Gaskets: Perimeter type, silicone rubber.• Latches: Magnetic type with anti-microbial pull handle.• Hinges (4): Chrome plated high-pressure cast zinc.
PAN SLIDES:• Wire angles (.306 dia.) nickel chrome plated steel, mounted on lift off posts.
• Spaced on 4-1/2" centers; adjustable on 1-1/2" centers.
HOT UNIT COMPONENTS:• Removable bottom mount hot unit.• Body: Formed .063 aluminum with black control panel.• Thermostat: Electro-mechanical, room ambient to 200˚F. (93˚C.).• Pilot light.• Switch: ON-OFF rocker type.• Power cord: Permanent, 6 ft., 14/3 ga. with molded right angle plug.
• Heater: 1470 Watts.• Blower motor.• Thermometer.
POWER REQUIREMENTS:• 1500 Watts, 120 Volts, 60 Hz., single phase, 12.6 Amps., 15 Amp. service.
B
CB
A
5-15P
W
G
DATED: 7/26/10MODEL H135UA11, H135SUA11CAT. PAGE B-9, 9.1
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 123200 - 1
SECTION 123200 - INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops
4. Wall shelving.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for reinforcements in metal-
framed partitions for anchoring manufactured wood casework.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Show fabrication details, including types and locations of hardware. Show installation details,
including field joints and filler panels. Indicate manufacturer's catalog numbers for casework.
C. Samples for Initial Selection, Verification: For cabinet finishes and for each type of top material
indicated.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by
an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain manufactured wood casework from single source from single
manufacturer.
D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements for modular cabinets
in AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."
E. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material of
manufactured wood casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other
manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, of same finish
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 123200 - 2
material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver manufactured wood casework only after painting, utility roughing-in, and similar
operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate casework have been completed in installation
areas. If casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where
environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during
handling and installation.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install manufactured wood casework until spaces
are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with manufactured
wood casework by field measurements before fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements in walls and partitions for
support of manufactured wood casework.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of manufactured wood casework that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.
b. Warping of components.
c. Failure of operating hardware.
d. Deterioration of finishes.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and finish of manufactured wood casework
provided. Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform
permanent repairs to damaged casework finish.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 123200 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Manufactured Casework:
a. Dynamic Wood Solutions, Spring Lake MI, Contact: Ryan Gardner
1.231.766.0221
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.
B. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particleboard core unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
E. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for
density.
F. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130
G. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
H. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following: (Refer to drawing documents for laminate specified and locations for each
unit)
I. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm
thick at doors and drawer fronts, 1 mm thick elsewhere.
J. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ISSFA-2.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following: (Refer to drawing documents for colors and locations indicated, color not
indicated on drawings, submit manufacturers full range for architects selection)
2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 123200 - 4
2.3 CABINET MATERIALS
A. Exposed Cabinet Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all exposed edges.
B. Semiexposed Cabinet Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all semiexposed edges.
C. Concealed Cabinet Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade BKL.
2.4 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH
A. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on drawing documents.
B. PVC Edgebanding Color: As selected from casework manufacturer's full range
C. Solid-Surfacing Material Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range and as indicated on drawing documents.
2.5 CABINET FABRICATION
A. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Cabinet Construction: As required by referenced quality standard, but
not less than the following:
1. Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, and Tops of Wall Cabinets and Tall Cabinets: 3/4-inch
(19-mm) particleboard, plastic-laminate faced[ on exposed surfaces,
2. Shelves: 3/4-inch (19-mm) particleboard, plastic-laminate faced[ on exposed surfaces,
3. Backs of Cabinets: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) particleboard, plastic-laminate faced[ on exposed
surfaces,.
4. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch (19-mm) particleboard, plastic-laminate faced.
5. Drawer Sides and Backs: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) solid-wood or veneer-core hardwood
plywood with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints.
6. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) hardwood plywood glued and dadoed into front,
back, and sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) material for drawers more than 24
inches (600 mm) wide.
7. Doors: 3/4-inch (19-mm) particleboard or MDF, plastic-laminate faced.
B. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and
indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets.
2.6 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish,
commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 123200 - 5
B. Butt Hinges: Powder-coated, semiconcealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9,
Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide 2 hinges for doors less than 48
inches (1220 mm) high and 3 hinges for doors more than 48 inches (1220 mm) high.
C. Pulls: Solid aluminum wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws.
D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated, steel ball-bearing slides.
E. Adjustable Shelf Supports: 2-pin locking plastic shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9,
Type B04013
F. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, molded-plastic
grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
2.7 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane free of
defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets.
B. Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded to both sides of 1-1/8-inch (29-
mm) plywood or particleboard. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded.
1. Construct top and backsplash from one piece of plastic laminate with rolled edges and
coved intersection. Where indicated, provide separate end splashes fitted to top.
2. Use exterior plywood or exterior glue particleboard for countertops containing sinks.
C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Tops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material with front
edge built up with same material.
1. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material; slightly eased at
edge
2.8 WALL SHELVING
A. Plastic-Laminate Shelving: Plastic-laminate sheet, Grade HGL or HGP, shop bonded to both
sides of particleboard. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded.
1. Shelf Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance
of manufactured wood casework.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 123200 - 6
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where manufactured
wood casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with
fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch (1.5
mm) of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to masonry or framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in walls and partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Bolt
adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors
and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16
inch (1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, or framing, blocking, or
reinforcements in walls or partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm).
1. Fasten through back, near top and bottom, at ends, and not more than 16 inches (400 mm)
o.c.
D. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises unless otherwise
indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet
accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.
E. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind.
Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TOPS
A. Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels,
splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in
shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints
where shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices
located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding
24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a
constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.
B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at
each front, end, and back.
C. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent
deflection.
D. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another
permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.
BMA Architects P.C. 1496-15
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 123200 - 7
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SHELVING
A. Securely fasten shelf standards to masonry, partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements
in partitions.
B. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.
C. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.
B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to
match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
C. Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over
countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm) o.c.
Remove protection at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 123200